P442 Areva Distance Relay

MiCOM P441, P442, P444 Technical Manual Numerical Distance Protection Platform Hardware Version: K Platform Software Version: 50 Publication Reference: P44x/EN T/H75 P44x/EN T/H75 © 2011. ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of ALSTOM. The other names mentioned, registered or not, are the property of their respective companies. The technical and other data contained in this document is provided for information only. Neither ALSTOM, its officers or employees accept responsibility for, or should be taken as making any representation or warranty (whether express or implied), as to the accuracy or completeness of such data or the achievement of any projected performance criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to revise or change this data at any time without further notice. GRID Technical Guide P44x/EN T/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 1/2 Numerical Distance Protection MiCOM P44x GENERAL CONTENT Safety Section P44x/EN SS/H11 Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 Hardware Description P44x/EN HW/H75 Application Guide P44x/EN AP/H75 Technical Data P44x/EN TD/H75 Installation P44x/EN IN/H75 Commissioning & Maintenance P44x/EN CM/H75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheet P44x/EN RS/H75 Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/H75 Relay Menu Database P44x/EN GC/H75 Menu Content Tables P44x/EN HI/H75 Version Compatibility P44x/EN VC/H75 P44x/EN T/H75 Technical Guide Page 2/2 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Safety Section P44x/EN SS/H11 SS SAFETY SECTION P44x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section SS Safety Section P44x/EN SS/H11 (SS) - 1 SS CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION 3 2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3 3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4 3.1 Symbols 4 3.2 Labels 4 4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4 5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7 6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 7 6.1 Protective fuse rating 7 6.2 Protective class 7 6.3 Installation category 7 6.4 Environment 8 P44x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) - 2 SS Safety Section P44x/EN SS/H11 (SS) - 3 STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION FOR ALSTOM GRID EQUIPMENT 1. INTRODUCTION This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also includes reference to typical equipment label markings. The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant equipment documentation for data specific to a particular equipment. SS Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label. Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced. Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment. 2. HEALTH AND SAFETY The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of this Safety Section, or the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M). When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who:  Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected;  Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;  Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices;  Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid). The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Alstom Grid technical sales office and request the necessary information. P44x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) - 4 3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT For safety reasons the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or commissioned. SS 3.1 Symbols Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal. Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) Terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply. *NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND. 3.2 Labels See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labeling information. 4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning, or servicing the equipment. Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. The clamping screws of all terminal block connectors, for field wiring, using M4 screws shall be tightened to a nominal torque of 1.3 Nm. Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections shall be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. Safety Section P44x/EN SS/H11 (SS) - 5 Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate the health of the device. Alstom Grid strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram. Protection Class I Equipment - Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. - The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost. - When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar. The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² (3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked: - Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation); - CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections; - Protective fuse rating; - Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable); - Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application. Accidental touching of exposed terminals If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided. Equipment use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed. SS P44x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) - 6 UL and CSA/CUL listed or recognized equipment To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the equipment should be installed using UL and/or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation. For external protective fuses a UL or CSA Listed fuse shall be used. The Listed type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c. for example type AJT15. Where UL or CSA Listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture capacity (HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c. may be used, for example Red Spot type NIT or TIA. Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it. For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies. For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. SS Safety Section P44x/EN SS/H11 (SS) - 7 External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. *Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe. Fiber optic communication Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. Cleaning The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed. SS 5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL De-commissioning The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to de-commissioning. Disposal It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment. 6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. 6.1 Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible. DANGER - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous voltages. 6.2 Protective class IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). EN 60255-27: 2005 This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety. P44x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) - 8 SS 6.3 Installation category IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation category III (Overvoltage Category III): EN 60255-27: 2005 Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 , 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits. 6.4 Environment The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet of housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected). Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety Altitude - Operation up to 2000m standards. IEC 60255-27:2005 EN 60255-27: 2005 Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 INTRODUCTION P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 1/36 CONTENT 1. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM 3 2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES 4 3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE 5 3.1 Introduction to the relay 5 3.1.1 Front panel 5 3.1.2 Relay rear panel 8 3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options 10 3.3 Menu structure 11 3.3.1 Protection settings 12 3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings 12 3.3.3 Control and support settings 12 3.4 Password protection 13 3.5 Relay configuration 13 3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) 14 3.6.1 Default display and menu time-out 15 3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing 15 3.6.3 Hotkey menu navigation (since version C2.X) 15 3.6.4 Password entry 16 3.6.5 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records 17 3.6.6 Setting changes 17 3.7 Front communication port user interface 18 3.8 Rear communication port user interface 20 3.8.1 Courier communication 20 3.8.2 Modbus communication 22 3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication 23 3.8.4 DNP 3.0 Communication 24 3.8.5 IEC61850 Ethernet Interface (since version C3.X) 25 3.9 Second rear Communication Port 31 3.10 InterMiCOM Teleprotection (since C2.X) 33 3.10.1 Physical Connections 33 3.10.2 Direct Connection 34 3.10.3 Modem Connection 34 3.10.4 Settings 34 3.11 Ethernet Rear Port (option) – since version C2.X 35 P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 2/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 3/36 1. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from ALSTOM Grid Protection and Control. Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility. MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control system. The components within MiCOM are:  P range protection relays;  C range control products;  M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;  S range versatile PC support and substation control packages. MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre enabling remote monitoring and control to take place. For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website: www.alstom.com/grid/sas P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 4/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relay’s use and application. The technical manual include the previous technical documentation, as follows: Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay and a technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection engineers concerned with the selection and application of the relay for the protection of the power system. Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is intended for site engineers who are responsible for the installation, commissioning and maintenance of the relay. The chapter content within the technical manual is summarised below: Safety Guide P44x/EN IT Introduction A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start using the relay. P44x/EN HW Relay Description Overview of the operation of the relay’s hardware and software. This chapter includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay. P44x/EN AP Application Notes: Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay including both the protection elements and the relay’s other functions such as event and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable scheme logic. This chapter includes a description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay. P44x/EN TD Technical Data Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended operating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with technical standards is quoted where appropriate. P44x/EN IN Installation Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided incorporating earthing recommendations. P44x/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined. P44x/EN CO External Connection Diagrams All external wiring connections to the relay. P44x/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP 3.0 Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description of each. Default Programmable Scheme Logic P44x/EN HI Menu Content Tables P44x/EN VC Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility Repair Form Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 5/36 3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to get started using the relay. 3.1 Introduction to the relay 3.1.1 Front panel The front panel of the relay is shown in the following figures, with the hinged covers at the top and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise the environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed. Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the relay front panel until it is clear of the seal tab. The cover can then be moved vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel. User programable function LEDs TRIP ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY = CLEAR = READ = ENTER SER N o DIAG N o Zn Vx Vn V V 1/5 A 50/60 Hz SK 1 SK 2 Serial N˚ and I*, V Ratings Top cover Fixed function LEDs Bottom cover Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port Keypad LCD P0103ENa FIGURE 1 - RELAY FRONT VIEW (HARDWARE A – B AND C) P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 6/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 User programable function LEDs TRIP ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY = CLEAR = READ = ENTER SER N o DIAG N o In Vx Vn V V 1/5 A 50/60 Hz Serial N o and I * , V Ratings Top cover Fixed function LEDs Bottom cover Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port Keypad LCD P0103ENb Hotkeys FIGURE 2 - RELAY FRONT VIEW ARRANGEMENT WITH HOTKEYS (HARDWARE G, H AND J) P0103ENe FIGURE 3 - RELAY FRONT VIEW WITH FUNCTION KEYS (HARDWARE K) Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 7/36 The front panel of the relay includes the following:  a 16-character by 2- or 3-line (since version C2.X) alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).  a keypad comprising 4 arrow keys , ,  and ), an enter key (), a clear key (), and a read key () and two additive hotkeys (since hardware G-J, software C2.X).  12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8 programmable function LEDs on the right hand side.  10 additional function keys plus 10 additional LEDs (since hardware K, software D1.x) Hotkey functionality (figures 2 and 3):  SCROLL: Starts scrolling through the various default displays.  STOP: Stops scrolling the default display for control of setting groups, control inputs and circuit breaker operation. Function key functionality (figure 3):  The relay front panel, features control pushbutton switches with programmable LEDs that facilitate local control. Factory default settings associate specific relay functions with these 10 direct-action pushbuttons and LEDs e.g. Enable/Disable the auto- recloser function. Using programmable scheme logic, the user can readily change the default direct-action pushbutton functions and LED indications to fit specific control and operational needs. Under the top hinged cover:  the relay serial number, and the relay’s current and voltage rating information*. Under the bottom hinged cover:  battery compartment to hold the 1 / 2 AA size battery which is used for memory back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records.  a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection.  a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high speed local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data connection. The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate the following conditions: Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED can be configured to be self-resetting)*. Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination, and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared. Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relay’s protection is unavailable. Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on at all times. It will be extinguished if the relay’s self-test facilities indicate that there is an error with the relay’s hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay. Since version C2.0, to improve the visibility of the settings via the front panel, the LCD contrast can be adjusted using the “LCD Contrast” setting with the last cell in the CONFIGURATION column. P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 8/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.1.2 Relay rear panel The rear panel of the relay is shown in figure 4. All current and voltage signals, digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay. Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485 communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear communication port (IEC103 or UCA2 by Ethernet) which are both optional. A second rear port (Courier) and an interMiCOM port are also available. C D E F B A Current and voltage input terminals (Terminal block C) Digital input connections (Terminal block D) Digital output (relays) connections (Terminal blocks B & E) Rear comms port (RS485) Power supply connection (Terminal block F) P3023ENa FIGURE 4A - RELAY REAR VIEW 40TE CASE A C B D F G E RX TX IRIG-B H J Current and voltage input terminals (Terminal block C) Optional fibre optic connection (Terminal block A) Digital input connections (Terminal blocks D & E) Digital output (relays) connections (Terminal blocks F & H) Optional IRIG-B board (Terminal Block A) Rear comms port (RS485) (TB J) Power supply connection (TB J) P3024ENa FIGURE 4B - RELAY REAR VIEW 60 TE Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 9/36 Optional fibre optic connection IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) 1A/5A Current and voltage input terminals (Terminal block C) Programmable digital input connections (Terminal blocks D, E & F) Rear comms port (RS485) Optional IRIG-B board Programmable digital outputs (relays) connections (Terminal blocks J, K, L & M) Power supply connection (Terminal block N) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 2 3 19 7 8 9 21 4 5 6 20 10 11 12 22 13 14 15 23 16 17 18 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 IRIG-B TX RX A B C E F G H J K L M N D P3025ENa FIGURE 4C - RELAY REAR VIEW 80 TE Refer to the wiring diagram in chapter P44x/EN CO for complete connection details. (for 2 nd rear port in model 42 or 44) P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 10/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options The relay has three user interfaces:  the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad.  the front port which supports Courier communication.  the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0. The protocol for the rear port must be specified when the relay is ordered.  the optional Ethernet port wich supports IEC61850 (since version C3.X),  The optional second rear port wich supports Courier protocol (since version C3.X). The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from the three interfaces are summarised in Table 1. Keypad/ LCD Courier Modbus IEC 870-5-103 DNP3.0 IEC 61850 (3) Display & modification of all settings • • • • (2) Digital I/O signal status • • • • • • Display/extraction of measurements • • • • • • Display/extraction of fault records • • • • • • Extraction of disturbance records • • • • (Floc in %) (1) • Programmable scheme logic settings • Reset of fault & alarm records • • • • • Clear event & fault records • • • • (2) • Time synchronisation • • • • • Control commands • • • • • TABLE 1 (1) since version C2.X. (2) with generic commands (3) Since version C3.X. Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 11/36 3.3 Menu structure The relay’s menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained within the same column. As shown in figure 5, the top row of each column contains the heading which describes the settings contained within that column. Movement between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A complete list of all of the menu settings is given in Appendix A of the manual. Up to 4 protection setting groups Column data settings Column header Control & support Group 1 Repeated for Groups 2, 3, 4 System data View records Overcurrent Earth fault P4003ENa FIGURE 5 - MENU STRUCTURE All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings, disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S) settings. One of two different methods is used to change a setting depending on which category the setting falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used by the relay immediately after they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a temporary ‘scratchpad’. It activates all the new settings together, but only after it has been confirmed that the new settings are to be adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security, and so that several setting changes that are made within a group of protection settings will all take effect at the same time. P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 12/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.3.1 Protection settings The protection settings include the following items:  protection element settings  scheme logic settings  auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)*   fault locator settings (where appropriate)* There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active group, and is used by the protection elements. 3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings The disturbance recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position, selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal sources that trigger the recording. 3.3.3 Control and support settings The control and support settings include:  relay configuration settings  open/close circuit breaker*  CT & VT ratio settings*  reset LEDs  active protection setting group  password & language settings  circuit breaker control & monitoring settings*  communications settings  measurement settings  event & fault record settings  user interface settings  commissioning settings  may vary according to relay type/model Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 13/36 3.4 Password protection The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is enabled determines which of the relay’s settings can be changed and is controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are summarised in Table 2. Access level Operations enabled Level 0 No password required Read access to all settings, alarms, event records and fault records Level 1 Password 1 or 2 As level 0 plus: Control commands, e.g. circuit breaker open/close. Reset of fault and alarm conditions. Reset LEDs. Clearing of event and fault records. Level 2 As level 1 plus: Password 2 required All other settings. TABLE 2 Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a setting change is attempted, or by moving to the ‘Password’ cell in the ‘System data’ column of the menu. The level of access is independently enabled for each interface, that is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication port, the front panel access will remain at level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the front panel. The access level enabled by the password entry will time-out independently for each interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default level. If the passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied - contact ALSTOM Grid with the relay’s serial number. The current level of access enabled for an interface can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data' column, the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also be found as one of the default display options. The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default menu access level to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the relay settings without the correct password. The default menu access level is set in the ‘Password control’ cell which is found in the ‘System data’ column of the menu (note that this setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled). 3.5 Relay configuration The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection, control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay, there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable many of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is disabled are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a function change the relevant cell in the ‘Configuration’ column from ‘Enabled’ to ‘Disabled’. The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is selected as active through the ‘Active settings’ cell. A protection setting group can also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group. The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to be copied to another group. To do this firstly set the ‘Copy from’ cell to the protection setting group to be copied, then set the ‘Copy to’ cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used by the relay following confirmation. To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the ‘Restore defaults’ cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set the ‘Restore P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 14/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 defaults’ cell to ‘All settings’ to restore the default values to all of the relay’s settings, not just the protection groups’ settings. The default settings will initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station. 3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay, with the information displayed on the LCD. The , , ,  and  keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the rate of change or movement becomes. System frequency Date and time 3-phase voltage Alarm messages Other default displays Column 1 System data Column 2 View records Column n Group 4 Overcurrent Data 1.1 Language Data 2.1 Last record Data 1.2 Password Data 2.2 Time and date Data 1.n Password level 2 Data 2.n C - A voltage Data n.n I> char angle Data n.2 I>1 directional Data n.1 I>1 function Other setting cells in column 1 Other setting cells in column 2 Other setting cells in column n Note: The C key will return to column header from any menu cell C C C P0105ENa FIGURE 6 - FRONT PANEL USER INTERFACE Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 15/36 3.6.1 Default display and menu time-out The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained. The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options: 3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is selected with the ‘Default display’ cell of the ‘Measure’t setup’ column. Also, from the default display the different default display options can be scrolled through using the  and  keys. However the menu selected default display will be restored following the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will be replaced by: Alarms/Faults Present Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not affected if the display is showing the ‘Alarms/Faults present’ message. 3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in figure 6. Thus, starting at the default display the  key will display the first column heading. To select the required column heading use the  and  keys. The setting data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the  and  keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the [up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key . It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the default display press the  key or the clear key  from any of the column headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of the column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the  key, as the auto-repeat will stop at the column heading. To move to the default display, the  key must be released and pressed again. 3.6.3 Hotkey menu navigation (since version C2.X) The hotkey menu can be browsed using the two keys directly below the LCD. These are known as direct access keys. The direct access keys perform the function that is displayed directly above them on the LCD. Thus, to access the hotkey menu from the default display the direct access key below the “HOTKEY” text must be pressed. Once in the hotkey menu the  and  keys can be used to scroll between the available options and the direct access keys can be used to control the function currently displayed. If neither the  or  keys are pressed with 20 seconds of entering a hotkey sub menu, the relay will revert to the default display. The clear key C will also act to return to the default menu from any page of the hotkey menu. The layout of a typical page of the hotkey menu is described below. The top line shows the contents of the previous and next cells for easy menu navigation. The centre line shows the function. The bottom line shows the options assigned to the direct access keys. The functions available in the hotkey menu are listed below: 3.6.3.1 Setting group selection (since version C2.X) The user can either scroll using through the available setting groups or the setting group that is currently displayed. When the SELECT button is pressed a screen confirming the current setting group is displayed for 2 seconds before the user is prompted with the or options again. The user can exit the sub menu by using the left and right arrow keys. For more information on setting group selection refer to “Changing setting group” section in the Application Notes (P440/EN AP). P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 16/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.6.3.2 Control inputs – user assignable functions (since version C2.X) The number of control inputs (user assignable functions – USR ASS) represented in the hotkey menu is user configurable in the “CTRL I/P CONFIG” column. The chosen inputs can be SET/RESET using the hotkey menu. For more information refer to the “Control Inputs” section in the Application Notes (P44x/EN AP). 3.6.3.3 CB control (since version C2.X) The CB control functionality varies from one Px40 relay to another. For a detailed description of the CB control via the hotkey menu refer to the “Circuit breaker control” section of the Application Notes (P440/EN AP). HOT KEY MENU EXIT MiCOM P140 HOTKEY CB CTRL SETTING GROUP 1 SELECT NXT GRP CONTROL INPUT 1 ON EXIT CONTROL INPUT 2 ON EXIT CONTROL INPUT 2 ON EXIT SETTING GROUP 2 SELECT NXT GRP SETTING GROUP 2 SELECTED CONTROL INPUT 1 ON CONTROL INPUT 1 EXIT OFF Confirmation screen displayed for 2 seconds Confirmation screen dispalyed for 2 seconds (See CB Control in Application Notes) Default Display NOTE: Key returns the user to the Hotkey Menu Screen P1246ENa FIGURE 7 - HOTKEY MENU NAVIGATION 3.6.4 Password entry When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear: Enter password **** Level 1 NOTE: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed. Press the  and  keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move between the character fields of the password, use the  and  keys. The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key . The display will revert to ‘Enter Password’ if an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting then the display will return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of password has not been entered then the password prompt page will be returned to. To escape from this prompt press the clear key . Alternatively, the password can be entered using the ‘Password’ cell of the ‘System data’ column. Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 17/36 For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the ‘Password’ menu cell in the ‘System data’ column and pressing the clear key  instead of entering a password. 3.6.5 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be self-resetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm messages press the read key . When all alarms have been viewed, but not cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of this use the  key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the following prompt will appear: Press clear to reset alarms To clear all alarm messages press ; to return to the alarms/faults present display and leave the alarms uncleared, press . Depending on the password configuration settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm messages can be cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have been cleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following a trip. Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has been entered using the  key, the  key can be pressed, this will move the display straight to the fault record. Pressing  again will move straight to the alarm reset prompt where pressing  once more will clear all alarms. 3.6.6 Setting changes To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell. To change the cell value press the enter key  which will bring up a flashing cursor on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if the appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or  keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required bit or character to be changed must first be selected using the  and  keys. When the desired new value has been reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing . Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear button  is pressed or if the menu time-out occurs. For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required changes have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key. Prior to returning to the default display the following prompt will be given: Update settings? Enter or clear Pressing  will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing  will cause the relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they are entered, without ‘Update settings?’ prompt. P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 18/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.7 Front communication port user interface The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232 serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in figure 8. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is the communication language developed by ALSTOM Grid Protection & Control to allow communication with its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 95/NT based software package. d FIGURE 8 - FRONT PORT CONNECTION The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of the relay’s 9-pin front port are as follows: Pin no. 2 Tx Transmit data Pin no. 3 Rx Receive data Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 19/36 None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual): 25 Way 9 Way Pin no. 3 2 Rx Receive data Pin no. 2 3 Tx Transmit data Pin no. 7 5 0V Zero volts common For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC, as shown in figure 9. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a ‘straight through’ serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a ‘cross-over’ serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay. FIGURE 9 - PC – RELAY SIGNAL CONNECTION Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PC’s communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relay’s communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below: Protocol Courier Baud rate 19,200 bits/s Courier address 1 Message format 11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity), 1 stop bit The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has been enabled will be revoked. P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 20/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.8 Rear communication port user interface The rear port can support one of four communication protocols (Courier, Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. See Appendix B for details of the connection terminals. The rear port provides K- Bus/EIA(RS)485 serial data communication and is intended for use with a permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of the three connections, two are for the signal connection, and the other is for the earth shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity. The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the ‘Communications’ column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. The first cell down the column shows the communication protocol being used by the rear port. 3.8.1 Courier communication Courier is the communication language developed by ALSTOM Grid Energy Automation & Information to allow remote interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier works on a master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the form of a database, and respond with information from the database when it is requested by a master unit. The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such as MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is a Windows NT4.0/95 compatible software package which is specifically designed for setting changes with the relay. To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a KITZ K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter is required. This unit is available from ALSTOM Grid SAS. A typical connection arrangement is shown in figure 10. For more detailed information on other possible connection arrangements refer to the manual for the Courier master station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol converter. Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in length and have up to 32 relays connected to it. Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 21/36 P0109ENe FIGURE 10 - REMOTE COMMUNICATION CONNECTION ARRANGEMENTS Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Only two settings apply to the rear port using Courier, the relay’s address and the inactivity timer. Synchronous communication is used at a fixed baud rate of 64kbits/s. P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 22/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol Courier The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay: Remote address 1 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in figure 10, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an on-line editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the ‘Save changes’ cell of the ‘Configuration’ column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not require this action for the setting changes to take effect. 3.8.2 Modbus communication Modbus is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action. Modbus communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. To use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings apply to the rear port using Modbus which are described below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol Modbus The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay: Modbus address 23 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer number between 1 and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same Modbus address. The Modbus address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 23/36 The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s Modbus communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’, ‘19200 bits/s’ and ‘38400 bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames: Parity None The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. 3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC 60870-5-103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct connection to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to commands from a master station. The method of communication uses standardised messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol. To use the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings apply to the rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are described below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 The next cell down controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the relay: Remote address 162 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same IEC 60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 24/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are supported by the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’ and ‘19200 bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master station. The next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103 measurements: Measure’t period 30.00 s The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be set between 1 and 60 seconds. The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the communication: Physical link EIA(RS)485 The default setting is to select the electrical EIA(RS)485 connection. If the optional fibre optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to ‘Fibre optic’. The next cell down can be used to define the primary function type for this interface, where this is not explicitly defined for the application by the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol*. Function type 226 3.8.4 DNP 3.0 Communication The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP User Group. Information about the user group, DNP 3.0 in general and protocol specifications can be found on their website: www.dnp.org The relay operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol plus some of the features from level 3. DNP 3.0 communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. To use the rear port with DNP 3.0 communication, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms setting’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings apply to the rear port using DNP 3.0, which are described below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communications protocol: Protocol DNP 3.0 The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the relay: DNP 3.0 address 232 Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP 3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1 and 65519 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same DNP 3.0 address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 25/36 The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates are supported by the relay ‘1200bits/s’, ‘2400bits/s’, ‘4800bits/s’, ’9600bits/s’, ‘19200bits/s’ and ‘38400bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column controls the parity format used in the data frames: Parity None The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request from the master by the relay: Time Synch Enabled The time synch can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP 3.0 master to synchronise the time. 3.8.5 IEC61850 Ethernet Interface (since version C3.X) 3.8.5.1 Introduction IEC 61850 is the international standard for Ethernet-based communication in substations. It enables integration of all protection, control, measurement and monitoring functions within a substation, and additionally provides the means for interlocking and inter-tripping. It combines the convenience of Ethernet with the security which is essential in substations today. The MiCOM protection relays can integrate with the PACiS substation control systems, to complete ALSTOM Grid Automation's offer of a full IEC 61850 solution for the substation. The majority of MiCOM Px4x relay types can be supplied with Ethernet, in addition to traditional serial protocols. Relays which have already been delivered with UCA2 on Ethernet can be easily upgraded to IEC 61850. 3.8.5.2 What is IEC 61850? IEC 61850 is an international standard, comprising 14 parts, which defines a communication architecture for substations. The standard defines and offers much more than just a protocol. It provides:  standardized models for IEDs and other equipment within the substation  standardized communication services (the methods used to access and exchange data)  standardized formats for configuration files  peer-to-peer (e.g. relay to relay) communication The standard includes mapping of data onto Ethernet. Using Ethernet in the substation offers many advantages, most significantly including:  high-speed data rates (currently 100 Mbits/s, rather than 10’s of kbits/s or less used by most serial protocols)  multiple masters (called “clients”)  Ethernet is an open standard in every-day use P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 26/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 ALSTOM Grid has been involved in the Working Groups which formed the standard, building on experience gained with UCA2, the predecessor of IEC 61850. 3.8.5.2.1 Interoperability A major benefit of IEC 61850 is interoperability. IEC 61850 standardizes the data model of substation IEDs. This responds to the utilities’ desire of having easier integration for different vendors’ products, i.e. interoperability. It means that data is accessed in the same manner in different IEDs from either the same or different IED vendors, even though, for example, the protection algorithms of different vendors’ relay types remain different. When a device is described as IEC 61850-compliant, this does not mean that it is interchangeable, but does mean that it is interoperable. You cannot simply replace one product with another, however the terminology is pre-defined and anyone with prior knowledge of IEC 61850 should be able very quickly integrate a new device without the need for mapping of all of the new data. IEC 61850 will inevitably bring improved substation communications and interoperability, at a lower cost to the end user. 3.8.5.2.2 The data model To ease understanding, the data model of any IEC 61850 IED can be viewed as a hierarchy of information. The categories and naming of this information is standardized in the IEC 61850 specification. FIGURE 11 - DATA MODEL LAYERS IN IEC 61850 The levels of this hierarchy can be described as follows: Physical Device Identifies the actual IED within a system. Typically the device’s name or IP address can be used (for example Feeder_1 or 10.0.0.2). Logical Device– Identifies groups of related Logical Nodes within the Physical Device. For the MiCOM relays, 5 Logical Devices exist: Control, Measurements, Protection, Records, System. Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 27/36 Wrapper/Logical Node Instance Identifies the major functional areas within the IEC 61850 data model. Either 3 or 6 characters are used as a prefix to define the functional group (wrapper) while the actual functionality is identified by a 4 character Logical Node name suffixed by an instance number. For example, XCBR1 (circuit breaker), MMXU1 (measurements), FrqPTOF2 (overfrequency protection, stage 2). Data Object This next layer is used to identify the type of data you will be presented with. For example, Pos (position) of Logical Node type XCBR. Data Attribute This is the actual data (measurement value, status, description, etc.). For example, stVal (status value) indicating actual position of circuit breaker for Data Object type Pos of Logical Node type XCBR. 3.8.5.3 IEC 61850 in MiCOM relays IEC 61850 is implemented in MiCOM relays by use of a separate Ethernet card. This card manages the majority of the IEC 61850 implementation and data transfer to avoid any impact on the performance of the protection. In order to communicate with an IEC 61850 IED on Ethernet, it is necessary only to know its IP address. This can then be configured into either:  An IEC 61850 “client” (or master), for example a PACiS computer (MiCOM C264) or HMI, or  An “MMS browser”, with which the full data model can be retrieved from the IED, without any prior knowledge. 3.8.5.3.1 Capability The IEC 61850 interface provides the following capabilities: 1. Read access to measurements 2. All measurands are presented using the measurement Logical Nodes, in the ‘Measurements’ Logical Device. Reported measurement values are refreshed by the relay once per second, in line with the relay user interface. 3. Generation of unbuffered reports on change of status/measurement 4. Unbuffered reports, when enabled, report any change of state in statuses and/or measurements (according to deadband settings). 5. Support for time synchronization over an Ethernet link 6. Time synchronization is supported using SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol); this protocol is used to synchronize the internal real time clock of the relays. 7. GOOSE peer-to-peer communication 8. GOOSE communications of statuses are included as part of the IEC 61850 implementation. Please see section 6.6 for more details. 9. Disturbance record extraction 10. Extraction of disturbance records, by file transfer, is supported by the MiCOM relays. The record is extracted as an ASCII format COMTRADE file. Setting changes (e.g. of protection settings) are not supported in the current IEC 61850 implementation. In order to keep this process as simple as possible, such setting changes are done using MiCOM S1 Settings & Records program. This can be done as previously using the front port serial connection of the relay, or now optionally over the Ethernet connection if preferred. P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 28/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.8.5.4 IEC 61850 and Ethernet settings The settings which allow support for the IEC 61850 implementation are located in the following columns of the relay settings database:  Communication column for Ethernet settings  GOOSE Publisher column  GOOSE Subscriber column  Date & Time column for SNTP time synchronization settings. Settings for the Ethernet card are prefixed with “NIC” (Network Interface Card) in the MiCOM relay user interface. 3.8.5.5 Network connectivity Note: This section presumes a prior knowledge of IP addressing and related topics. Further details on this topic may be found on the Internet (search for IP Configuration) and in numerous relevant books. When configuring the relay for operation on a network, a unique IP address must be set on the relay. If the assigned IP address is duplicated elsewhere on the same network, the remote communications will operate in an indeterminate way. However, the relay will check for a conflict on every IP configuration change and at power up. An alarm will be raised if an IP conflict is detected. Similarly, a relay set with an invalid IP configuration (or factory default) will also cause an alarm to be displayed (Bad TCP/IP Cfg.). The relay can be configured to accept data from networks other than the local network by using the ‘NIC Gateway’ setting. 3.8.5.6 The data model of MiCOM relays The data model naming adopted in the Px40 relays has been standardized for consistency. Hence the Logical Nodes are allocated to one of the five Logical Devices, as appropriate, and the wrapper names used to instantiate Logical Nodes are consistent between Px40 relays. The data model is described in the Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) document, which is available separately. The MICS document provides lists of Logical Device definitions, Logical Node definitions, Common Data Class and Attribute definitions, Enumeration definitions, and MMS data type conversions. It generally follows the format used in Parts 7-3 and 7-4 of the IEC 61850 standard. 3.8.5.7 The communication services of MiCOM relays The IEC 61850 communication services which are implemented in the Px40 relays are described in the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) document, which is available separately. The PICS document provides the Abstract Communication Service Interface (ACSI) conformance statements as defined in Annex A of Part 7-2 of the IEC 61850 standard. Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 29/36 3.8.5.8 Peer-to-peer (GSE) communications The implementation of IEC 61850 Generic Substation Event (GSE) sets the way for cheaper and faster inter-relay communications. The generic substation event model provides the possibility for a fast and reliable system-wide distribution of input and output data values. The generic substation event model is based on the concept of an autonomous decentralization, providing an efficient method allowing the simultaneous delivery of the same generic substation event information to more than one physical device through the use of multicast services. The use of multicast messaging means that IEC 61850 GOOSE uses a publisher-subscriber system to transfer information around the network*. When a device detects a change in one of its monitored status points it publishes (i.e. sends) a new message. Any device that is interested in the information subscribes (i.e. listens) to the data it contains. Note: * Multicast messages cannot be routed across networks without specialized equipment. Each new message is re-transmitted at user-configurable intervals until the maximum interval is reached, in order to overcome possible corruption due to interference, and collisions. In practice, the parameters which control the message transmission cannot be calculated. Time must be allocated to the testing of GSE schemes before or during commissioning, in just the same way a hardwired scheme must be tested. 3.8.5.9 Scope MiCOM relays support the Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE). Each subscribed GOOSE input in a message from an external IED is mapped to a GOOSE Virtual Input in the receiving IED. A maximum of 32 GOOSE Virtual Inputs are available in the PSL. All GOOSE outputs from the MiCOM relay are BOOLEAN values derived directly from GOOSE Virtual Outputs. A maximum of 32 GOOSE Virtual Outputs are available in the PSL. All IEC GOOSE messages will be received but only the following data types can be decoded and mapped to a GOOSE Virtual Input: Name Type BSTR2 Basic data type BOOL Basic data type INT8 Basic data type INT16 Basic data type INT32 Basic data type UINT8 Basic data type UINT16 Basic data type UINT32 Basic data type SPS (Single Point Status) Common data class DPS (Double Point Status) Common data class INS (Integer Status) Common data class A single GOOSE message will be published by each Px40 IED. For further information about the GOOSE implementation in MiCOM relays, refer to the PICS document(s) for the relevant relay type(s). P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 30/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.8.5.10 IEC 61850 GOOSE Configuration The configuration settings for IEC 61850 GOOSE are split into two columns in the relay user interface:  GOOSE PUBLISHER, which is required to build and send a GOOSE message  GOOSE SUBSCRIBER, which is required to receive, decode and map GOOSE messages. The IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging is configured by way of the min. cycle time, max. cycle time, increment and message life period. Due to the risk of incorrect operation, specific care should be taken to ensure that the configuration is correct. Subscribing is done for each Virtual Input using the settings in the GOOSE SUBSCRIBER column. 3.8.5.11 Ethernet hardware The optional Ethernet card (ZN0012) has one variant which supports the IEC 61850 implementation, a card with RJ45 and SC (100Mb card). This allows the following connection media: 10BASE-T – 10Mb Copper Connection (RJ45 type) 100BASE-TX – 100Mb Copper Connection (RJ45 type) 100BASE-FX – 100Mb Fiber Optic Connection (SC type) This card is fitted into Slot A of the relay, which is the optional communications slot. When using IEC 61850 communications through the Ethernet card, the rear EIA(RS)485 and front EIA(RS)232 ports are also available for simultaneous use, using the Courier protocol. Each Ethernet card has a unique ‘Mac address’ used for Ethernet communications, this is also printed on the rear of the card, alongside the Ethernet sockets. When using copper Ethernet, it is important to use Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) or Foil Twisted Pair (FTP) cables, to shield the IEC 61850 communications against electromagnetic interference. The RJ45 connector at each end of the cable must be shielded, and the cable shield must be connected to this RJ45 connector shield, so that the shield is grounded to the relay case. Both the cable and the RJ45 connector at each end of the cable must be Category 5 minimum, as specified by the IEC 61850 standard. It is recommended that each copper Ethernet cable is limited to a maximum length of 3 meters and confined within one bay/cubicle. 3.8.5.12 Ethernet disconnection IEC 61850 ‘Associations’ are unique and made to the relay between the client (master) and server (IEC 61850 device). In the event that the Ethernet is disconnected, such associations are lost, and will need to be re-established by the client. The TCP_KEEPALIVE function is implemented in the relay to monitor each association, and terminate any which are no longer active. 3.8.5.13 Loss of power The relay allows the re-establishment of associations by the client without a negative impact on the relay’s operation after having its power removed. As the relay acts as a server in this process, the client must request the association. Uncommitted settings are cancelled when power is lost, and reports requested by connected clients are reset and must be re-enabled by the client when it next creates the new association to the relay. Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 31/36 3.9 Second rear Communication Port P2084ENA 3 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via KITZ101, K-Bus 2nd rear port via remote PC and S/S PC 2 nd RP (Courier) 1 st RP (Courier) KITZ 201 modem modem EIA(RS)232 EIA(RS)232 EIA(RS)232 port 1 EIA(RS)232 port 0 Master 1 Master 2 Master 3 K-Bus port 3 P O W E R S U P P L Y C E N T R A L P R O C E S S O R R.T.U. To SCADA K-Bus Note: 1 st RP could be any chosen protocol, 2 nd RP is always Courier KITZ102 “K-Bus Application” example FIGURE 12 - SECOND REAR PORT K-BUS APPLICATION 2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA485 2nd rear port via remote PC, Px40 & Px30 mixture plus front access 2 nd RP (EIA485) 1 st RP (Modbus/ IEC103) modem modem EIA232 EIA232 EIA232 Master 1 Master 2 EIA485 PO WE R SU PPL Y CE NT RAL PR OC ESS OR R.T.U. To SCADA CK222 Front port MiCOMS1 EIA232 Note: 1 st RP could be any chosen protocol, 2 nd RP is always Courier CK222 KITZ202/ 4 EIA485 “ EIA(RS)485 Application” example P2085ENA FIGURE 13 - SECOND REAR PORT EIA(RS)485 EXAMPLE P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 32/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 P2086ENA 2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA232 2nd rear port via remote PC, max EIA232 bus distance 15m, PC local front/ rear access 2 nd RP(EIA232) modem modem EIA232 EIA232 EIA232 Master 1 Master 2 EIA232 P O W E R S U P P L Y C E N T R A L P R O C E S S O R R.T.U. To SCADA EIA232 splitter Front port MiCOMS1 EIA232 Note: 1 st RP could be any chosen protocol, 2 nd RP is always Courier CK222 1 5 m m a x 1 st RP(Modbus / DNP/ IEC103) EIA485 “ EIA(RS)232 Application” example FIGURE 14 - SECOND REAR PORT EIA(RS)232 EXAMPLE For relays with Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications port, (P442 and P444 only) which will run the Courier language. This can be used over one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232. The settings for this port are located immediately below the ones for the first port as described in previous sections of this chapter. Move down the settings unit the following sub heading is displayed. REAR PORT2 (RP2) The next cell down indicates the language, which is fixed at Courier for RP2. RP2 Protocol Courier The next cell down indicates the status of the hardware, e.g. RP2 Card Status EIA232 OK The next cell allows for selection of the port configuration. RP2 Port Config EIA232 The port can be configured for EIA(RS)232, EIA(RS)485 or K-Bus. In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell selects the communication mode. RP2 Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2 The choice is either IEC60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or 10-bit no parity. Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 33/36 The next cell down controls the comms port address. RP2 Address 255 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in figure 10, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses a integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then use by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any massages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell down controls the baud rate. For K- Bus the baud rate is fixed at 64kbit/second between the relay and the KITZ interface at the end of the relay spur. RP2 Baud Rate 19200 Courier communications is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’, ‘19200 bits/s’ and ‘38400 bits/s’. 3.10 InterMiCOM Teleprotection (since C2.X) InterMiCOM is a protection signalling system that is an optional feature of MiCOM Px40 relays and provides a cost-effective alternative to discrete carrier equipment. InterMiCOM sends eight signals between the two relays in the scheme, with each signal having a selectable operation mode to provide an optimal combination of speed, security and dependability in accordance with the application. Once the information is received, it may be assigned in the Programmable Scheme Logic to any function as specified by the user’s application. 3.10.1 Physical Connections InterMiCOM on the Px40 relays is implemented using a 9-pin ‘D’ type female connector (labelled SK5) located at the bottom of the 2 nd Rear communication board. This connector on the Px40 relay is wired in DTE (Data Terminating Equipment) mode, as indicated below: Pin Acronym InterMiCOM Usage 1 DCD “Data Carrier Detect” is only used when connecting to modems otherwise this should be tied high by connecting to terminal 4. 2 RxD “Receive Data” 3 TxD “Transmit Data” 4 DTR “Data Terminal Ready” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel. 5 GND “Signal Ground” 6 Not used - 7 RTS “Ready To Send” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel. 8 Not used - 9 Not used - Depending upon whether a direct or modem connection between the two relays in the scheme is being used, the required pin connections are described below. P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 34/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.10.2 Direct Connection The EIA(RS)232 protocol only allows for short transmission distances due to the signalling levels used and therefore the connection shown below is limited to less than 15m. However, this may be extended by introducing suitable EIA(RS)232 to fibre optic convertors, such as the CILI203. Depending upon the type of convertor and fibre used, direct communication over a few kilometres can easily be achieved. This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have no ability to control the DCD line. 3.10.3 Modem Connection For long distance communication, modems may be used in which the case the following connections should be made. This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have the ability to control the DCD line. With this type of connection it should be noted that the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the modem should be 15m, and that a baud rate suitable for the communications path used should be selected. See P443/EN AP for setting guidelines. 3.10.4 Settings The settings necessary for the implementation of InterMiCOM are contained within two columns of the relay menu structure. The first column entitled “INTERMICOM COMMS” contains all the information to configure the communication channel and also contains the channel statistics and diagnostic facilities. The second column entitled “INTERMICOM CONF” selects the format of each signal and its fallback operation mode. The following table shows the relay menu for the communication channel including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Introduction P44x/EN IT/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 35/36 Setting Range Menu Text Default Setting Min Max Step Size INTERMICOM COMMS IM Output Status 00000000 IM Input Status 00000000 Source Address 1 1 10 1 Receive Address 2 1 10 1 Baud Rate 9600 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 Remote Device Px40 Px40 Ch Statistics Invisible Invisible / Visible Reset Statistics No No / Yes Ch Diagnostics Invisible Invisible / Visible Loopback Mode Disabled Disabled / Internal / External Test pattern 11111111 00000000 11111111 - 3.11 Ethernet Rear Port (option) – since version C2.X If UCA2.0 is chosen when the relay is ordered, the relay is fitted with an Ethernet interface card. See P44x/EN UC/E44 section 4.4 for more detail of the Ethernet hardware. P44x/EN IT/H75 Introduction Page 36/36 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 RELAY DESCRIPTION P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 1/48 CONTENT 1. RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW 5 1.1 Hardware overview 5 1.1.1 Power supply module 5 1.1.2 Main processor board 5 1.1.3 Co-processor board 5 1.1.4 Input module 5 1.1.5 Input and output boards 5 1.1.6 IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) 5 1.1.7 Second rear comms and InterMiCOM board (optional since version C2.X) 7 1.1.8 Ethernet board (from version C2.0 up to C2.7) 7 1.2 Software overview 7 1.2.1 Real-time operating system 7 1.2.2 System services software 7 1.2.3 Platform software 7 1.2.4 Protection & control software 7 1.2.5 Disturbance Recorder 8 2. HARDWARE MODULES 9 2.1 Processor board 9 2.2 Co-processor board 9 2.3 Internal communication buses 9 2.4 Input module 10 2.4.1 Transformer board 10 2.4.2 Input board 10 2.4.3 Universal opto isolated logic inputs 10 2.5 Power supply module (including output relays) 12 2.5.1 Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface) 12 2.5.2 Output relay board 13 2.6 IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) 13 2.7 2nd rear communications board 14 2.8 Ethernet board 14 2.9 Mechanical layout 15 3. RELAY SOFTWARE 16 3.1 Real-time operating system 16 3.2 System services software 16 3.3 Platform software 17 3.3.1 Record logging 17 3.3.2 Settings database 17 3.3.3 Database interface 17 P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 2/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.4 Protection and control software 18 3.4.1 Overview - protection and control scheduling 18 3.4.2 Signal processing 18 3.4.3 Programmable scheme logic 19 3.4.4 Event and Fault Recording 19 3.4.5 Disturbance recorder 19 3.4.6 Fault locator 19 4. DISTANCE ALGORITHMS 21 4.1 Distance and Resistance Measurement 21 4.1.1 Phase-to-earth loop impedance 23 4.1.2 Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage).24 4.1.3 Phase-to-phase loop impedance 24 4.2 "Delta" Algorithms 25 4.2.1 Fault Modelling 25 4.2.2 Detecting a Transition 27 4.2.3 Confirmation 30 4.2.4 Directional Decision 30 4.2.5 Phase Selection 31 4.2.6 Summary 31 4.3 "Conventional" Algorithms 32 4.3.1 Convergence Analysis 33 4.3.2 Start-Up 33 4.3.3 Phase Selection 34 4.3.4 Directional Decision 35 4.3.5 Directional Decision during SOTF/TOR (Switch On To Fault/Trip On Reclose) 35 4.4 Faulted Zone Decision 36 4.5 Tripping Logic 37 4.6 Fault Locator 38 4.6.1 Selecting the fault location data 39 4.6.2 Processing algorithms 39 4.7 Power swing detection 40 4.7.1 Power swing detection 40 4.7.2 Line in one pole open condition (during single-pole trip) 41 4.7.3 Conditions for isolating lines 41 4.7.4 Tripping logic 41 4.7.5 Fault Detection after Single-phase Tripping (single-pole-open condition) 42 4.8 Double Circuit Lines 42 4.9 DEF Protection Against High Resistance Ground Faults 44 4.9.1 High Resistance Ground Fault Detection 44 4.9.2 Directional determination 44 4.9.3 Phase selection 44 4.9.4 Tripping Logic 45 Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 3/48 4.9.5 SBEF – Stand-By earth fault (not communication-aided) 46 5. SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS 47 5.1 Start-up self-testing 47 5.1.1 System boot 47 5.1.2 Initialisation software 47 5.1.3 Platform software initialisation & monitoring 48 5.2 Continuous self-testing 48 P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 4/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 5/48 1. RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1.1 Hardware overview The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of several modules which are drawn from a standard range. Some modules are essential while others are optional depending on the user’s requirements. The different modules that can be present in the relay are as follows: 1.1.1 Power supply module The power supply module provides a power supply to all of the other modules in the relay, at three different voltage levels. The power supply board also provides the RS485 electrical connection for the rear communication port. On a second board the power supply module contains relays which provide the output contacts. 1.1.2 Main processor board The processor board performs most of the calculations for the relay (fixed and programmable scheme logic, protection functions other than distance protection) and controls the operation of all other modules within the relay. The processor board also contains and controls the user interfaces (LCD, LEDs, keypad and communication interfaces). 1.1.3 Co-processor board The co-processor board manages the acquisition of analogue quantities, filters them and calculates the thresholds used by the protection functions. It also processes the distance algorithms. 1.1.4 Input module The input module converts the information contained in the analogue and digital input signals into a format suitable for the co-processor board. The standard input module consists of two boards: a transformer board to provide electrical isolation and a main input board which provides analogue to digital conversion and the isolated digital inputs. 1.1.5 Input and output boards P441 P442 P444 Opto-inputs 8 x UNI (1) 16 x UNI (1) 24 x UNI (1) Relay outputs 6 N/O 8 C/O 9 N/O 12 C/O 24 N/O 8 C/O (1) Universal voltage range opto inputs N/O – normally open C/O – change over Since version C2.X: - P444 could manage in option : 46 outputs - Fast outputs can be ordered following the cortec reference (available in the Technical Data Sheet document) - See also the hysteresis values of the optos in the §6.2 from chapter AP 1.1.6 IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) This board, which is optional, can be used where an IRIG-B signal is available to provide an accurate time reference for the relay. There is also an option on this board to specify a fibre optic rear communication port, for use with IEC60870 communication only. All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus which allows the processor board to send and receive information to and from the other modules as required. There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sample data from the input module to the processor. figure 1 shows the modules of the relay and the flow of information between them. P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 6/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Main processor board Relay board Power supply board Transformer board Input board Parallel data bus E²PROM SRAM Flash EPROM CPU Front LCD panel RS232 Front comms port Parallel test port LEDs Current & voltage inputs (6 to 8) D i g i t a l i n p u t s ( x 8 o r x 1 6 o r x 2 4 ) Power supply Rear RS485 communication port O u t p u t r e l a y c o n t a c t s ( x 1 4 o r x 2 1 o r x 3 2 ) ADC IRIG-B board optional IRIG-B signal Fibre optic rear comms port optional O u t p u t r e l a y s O p t o - i s o l a t e d i n p u t s Analogue input signals Power supply (3 voltages), rear comms data Digital input values Power supply, rear comms data, output relay status Timing data Watchdog contacts Field voltage S e r i a l d a t a b u s ( s a m p l e d a t a ) Alarm, event, fault, disturbance & maintenance record Present values of all settings Comms between main & coprocessor boards CPU code & data, setting database data CPU code & data Default settings & parameters, language text, software code Battery backed-up SRAM CPU FPGA SRAM Coprocessor board P3026ENb FIGURE 1 - RELAY MODULES AND INFORMATION FLOW Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 7/48 1.1.7 Second rear comms and InterMiCOM board (optional since version C2.X) The optional second rear port is designed typically for dial-up modem access by protection engineers/operators, when the main port is reserved for SCADA traffic. It is denoted “SK4”. Communication is via one of three physical links: K-Bus, EIA(RS)485 or EIA(RS)232. The port supports full local or remote protection and control access by MiCOM S1 software. The second rear port is also available with an on board IRIG-B input. The optional board also houses port “SK5”, the InterMiCOM teleprotection port. InterMiCOM permits end-to-end signalling with a remote P440 relay, for example in a distance protection channel aided scheme. Port SK5 has an EIA(RS)232 connection, allowing connection to a MODEM, or compatible multiplexers. 1.1.8 Ethernet board (from version C2.0 up to C2.7) This is a mandatory board for UCA2.0 enabled relays. It provides network connectivity through either copper or fibre media at rates of 10Mb/s or 100Mb/s. This board, the IRIG-B board and second rear comms board are mutually exclusive as they both utilise slot A within the relay case. 1.2 Software overview The software for the relay can be conceptually split into four elements: the real-time operating system, the system services software, the platform software and the protection and control software. These four elements are not distinguishable to the user, and are all processed by the same processor board. The distinction between the four parts of the software is made purely for the purpose of explanation here: 1.2.1 Real-time operating system The real time operating system is used to provide a framework for the different parts of the relay’s software to operate within. To this end the software is split into tasks. The real-time operating system is responsible for scheduling the processing of these tasks such that they are carried out in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible for the exchange of information between tasks, in the form of messages. 1.2.2 System services software The system services software provides the low-level control of the relay hardware. For example, the system services software controls the boot of the relay’s software from the non- volatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and provides driver software for the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via the serial communication ports. The system services software provides an interface layer between the control of the relay’s hardware and the rest of the relay software. 1.2.3 Platform software The platform software deals with the management of the relay settings, the user interfaces and logging of event, alarm, fault and maintenance records. All of the relay settings are stored in a database within the relay which provides direct compatibility with Courier communications. For all other interfaces (i.e. the front panel keypad and LCD interface, Modbus and IEC60870-5-103) the platform software converts the information from the database into the format required. The platform software notifies the protection & control software of all setting changes and logs data as specified by the protection & control software. 1.2.4 Protection & control software The protection and control software performs the calculations for all of the protection algorithms of the relay. This includes digital signal processing such as Fourier filtering and ancillary tasks such as the measurements. The protection & control software interfaces with the platform software for settings changes and logging of records, and with the system services software for acquisition of sample data and access to output relays and digital opto- isolated inputs. P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 8/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.2.5 Disturbance Recorder The disturbance recorder software is passed the sampled analogue values and logic signals from the protection and control software. This software compresses the data to allow a greater number of records to be stored. The platform software interfaces to the disturbance recorder to allow extraction of the stored records. Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 9/48 2. HARDWARE MODULES The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a separate function within the relay operation. This section describes the functional operation of the various hardware modules. 2.1 Processor board The relay is based around a TMS320VC33-150MHz (peak speed) floating point, 32-bit digital signal processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 75MHz. This processor performs all of the calculations for the relay, including the protection functions, control of the data communication and user interfaces including the operation of the LCD, keypad and LEDs. The processor board is located directly behind the relay’s front panel which allows the LCD and LEDs to be mounted on the processor board along with the front panel communication ports. These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for RS232 serial communications (e.g. using MiCOM S1 and Courier communications) and the 25-pin D-connector relay test port for parallel communication. All serial communication is handled using a two-channel 85C30 serial communications controller (SCC). The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories, volatile and non-volatile: the volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state) SRAM which is used for the storage and execution of the processor software, and data storage as required during the processor’s calculations. The non-volatile memory is sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory for non-volatile storage of software code and text together with default settings, 256kB of battery backed-up SRAM for the storage of disturbance, event, fault and maintenance record data and 32kB of E2PROM memory for the storage of configuration data, including the present setting values. 2.2 Co-processor board A second processor board is used in the relay for the processing of the distance protection algorithms. The processor used on the second board is the same as that used on the main processor board. The second processor board has provision for fast access (zero wait state) SRAM for use with both program and data memory storage. This memory can be accessed by the main processor board via the parallel bus, and this route is used at power-on to download the software for the second processor from the flash memory on the main processor board. Further communication between the two processor boards is achieved via interrupts and the shared SRAM. The serial bus carrying the sample data is also connected to the co-processor board, using the processor’s built-in serial port, as on the main processor board. From software version B1.0, coprocessor board works at 150MHz. 2.3 Internal communication buses The relay has two internal buses for the communication of data between different modules. The main bus is a parallel link which is part of a 64-way ribbon cable. The ribbon cable carries the data and address bus signals in addition to control signals and all power supply lines. Operation of the bus is driven by the main processor board which operates as a master while all other modules within the relay are slaves. The second bus is a serial link which is used exclusively for communicating the digital sample values from the input module to the main processor board. The DSP processor has a built-in serial port which is used to read the sample data from the serial bus. The serial bus is also carried on the 64-way ribbon cable. P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 10/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.4 Input module The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board and the analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module consist of two PCBs; the main input board and a transformer board. The P441, P442 and P444 relays provide three voltage inputs and four current inputs. They also provide an additional voltage input for the check sync function. 2.4.1 Transformer board The transformer board holds up to four voltage transformers (VTs) and up to five current transformers (CTs). The current inputs will accept either 1A or 5A nominal current (menu and wiring options) and the nominal voltage input is 110V. The transformers are used both to step-down the currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relay’s electronic circuitry and to provide effective isolation between the relay and the power system. The connection arrangements of both the current and voltage transformer secondaries provide differential input signals to the main input board to reduce noise. 2.4.2 Input board The main input board is shown as a block diagram in figure 2. It provides the circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for the analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the CTs and VTs on the transformer board(s), converts these to digital samples and transmits the samples to the processor board via the serial data bus. On the input board the analogue signals are passed through an anti-alias filter before being multiplexed into a single analogue-to-digital converter chip. The A – D converter provides 16-bit resolution and a serial data stream output. The digital input signals are opto isolated on this board to prevent excessive voltages on these inputs causing damage to the relay's internal circuitry. 2.4.3 Universal opto isolated logic inputs The P441, P442 and P444 relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part. i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling, tripping. They nominally provide a Logic 1 or On value for Voltages >80% of the set voltage and a Logic 0 or Off value for the voltages s60% of the set voltage. This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 11/48 C T C T B u f f e r 1 6 - b i t A D C S a m p l e c o n t r o l S e r i a l I n t e r f a c e 16:1 Multiplexer Up to 5 current inputs S e r i a l s a m p l e d a t a b u s P a r a l l e l b u s Parallel bus T r i g g e r f r o m p r o c e s s o r b o a r d A n t i - a l i a s f i l t e r s U p t o 5 U p t o 5 U p t o 5 D i f f n t o s i n g l e D i f f n t o s i n g l e L o w p a s s f i l t e r L o w p a s s f i l t e r V T V T 3/4 voltage inputs Transformer board Input board 4 4 D i f f n t o s i n g l e D i f f n t o s i n g l e L o w p a s s f i l t e r L o w p a s s f i l t e r C a l i b r a t i o n E ² P R O M O p t i c a l i s o l a t o r 8 d i g i t a l i n p u t s N o i s e f i l t e r O p t i c a l i s o l a t o r P3027ENa 4 B u f f e r N o i s e f i l t e r FIGURE 2 - MAIN INPUT BOARD The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present on the digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing. The input board holds 8 optical isolators for the connection of up to eight digital input signals. The opto-isolators are used with the digital signals for the same reason as the transformers with the analogue signals; to isolate the relay’s electronics from the power system environment. A 48V ‘field voltage’ supply is provided at the back of the relay for use in driving the digital opto-inputs. The input board provides some hardware filtering of the digital signals to remove unwanted noise before buffering the signals for reading on the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model, more than 8 digital input signals can be accepted by the relay. This is achieved by the use of an additional opto-board which contains the same provision for 8 isolated digital inputs as the main input board, but does not contain any of the circuits for analogue signals which are provided on the main input board. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised (available since version C2.0). Duals optos are available since C2.0 (hysteresis value selectable between 2 ranges). P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 12/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 The P440 series relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling, tripping. From software version C2.x they can also be programmed as Standard 60% - 80% or 50% - 70% to satisfy different operating constraints. Threshold levels are as follows: Standard 60% - 80% 50% - 70% Nominal battery voltage (Vdc) No Operation (logic 0) Vdc Operation (logic 1) Vdc No Operation (logic 0) Vdc Operation (logic 1) Vdc 24 / 27 19.2 16.8 30 / 34 24.0 21.0 48 / 54 38.4 33.6 110 / 125 88.0 77.0 220 / 250 176.0 154 This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised. This allows use of a pre-set filter of ½ cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for intertripping. This can be improved by switching off the ½ cycle filter in which case one of the following methods to reduce ac noise should be considered. The first method is to use double pole switching on the input, the second is to use screened twisted cable on the input circuit. 2.5 Power supply module (including output relays) The power supply module contains two PCBs, one for the power supply unit itself and the other for the output relays. The power supply board also contains the input and output hardware for the rear communication port which provides an RS485 communication interface. 2.5.1 Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface) One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature of the supply voltage that will be connected to the relay. The three options are shown in table 1 below. Nominal dc range Nominal ac range 24 – 48 V dc only 48 – 110 V 30 – 100 V rms 110 – 250 V 100 – 240 V rms TABLE 1 - POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 13/48 The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide isolated power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay. Three voltage levels are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits, 16V for the analogue electronics, e.g. on the input board, and 22V for driving the output relay coils. All power supply voltages including the 0V earth line are distributed around the relay via the 64-way ribbon cable. One further voltage level is provided by the power supply board which is the field voltage of 48V. This is brought out to terminals on the back of the relay so that it can be used to drive the optically isolated digital inputs. The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the RS485 communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The RS485 interface is used with the relay’s rear communication port to provide communication using one of either Courier, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 protocols. The RS485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and provides optical isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received. All internal communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via the output relay board which is connected to the parallel bus. The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one normally closed which are driven by the processor board. These are provided to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state. 2.5.2 Output relay board The output relay board holds seven relays, three with normally open contacts and four with changeover contacts. The relays are driven from the 22V power supply line. The relays’ state is written to or read from using the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model seven additional output contacts may be provided, through the use of up to three extra relay boards. Since version D1.X: ‘High break’ output relay boards consisting of four normally open output contacts are available as an option. 2.6 IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide an accurate timing reference for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is available. The IRIG-B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on the back of the relay. The timing information is used to synchronise the relay’s internal real-time clock to an accuracy of 1ms. The internal clock is then used for the time tagging of the event, fault maintenance and disturbance records. The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver which can be used for the rear communication port instead of the RS485 electrical connection (IEC60870 only). P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 14/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.7 2nd rear communications board For relays with Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications port,which will run the Courier language. This can be used over one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232. The second rear comms board and IRIG-B board are mutually exclusive since they use the same hardware slot. For this reason two versions of second rear comms board are available; one with an IRIG-B input and one without. The physical layout of the second rear comms board is shown in Figure 3. P2083ENa Language: Courier always Physical links: EIA 232 or EIA 485 (polarity sensitive) or K-Bus (non polarity sensitive) SK5 SK4 Physical links are s/w selectable Optional IRIG-B Courier Port (EIA232/EIA485) Not used (EIA232) FIGURE 3 - REAR COMMS. PORT 2.8 Ethernet board The ethernet board, presently only available for UCA2 communication variant relays, supports network connections of the following type: ÷ 10BASE-T ÷ 10BASE-FL ÷ 100BASE-TX ÷ 100BASE-FX For all copper based network connections an RJ45 style connector is supported. 10Mbit/s fibre network connections use an ST style connector while 100Mbit/s connections use the SC style fibre connection. An extra processor, a Motorola PPC, and memory block is fitted to the ethernet card that is responsible for running all the network related functions such as TCP/IP/OSI as supplied by VxWorks and the UCA2/MMS server as supplied by Sisco inc. The extra memory block also holds the UCA2 data model supported by the relay. Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 15/48 2.9 Mechanical layout The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at all joints giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for performance in the presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and spring clips are used to ground the module metalwork. Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the digital logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the rear communication port. A BNC connector is used for the optional IRIG-B signal. 9-pin and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay for data communication. Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relay’s CT inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when the board is removed. The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD and 12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate. P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 16/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3. RELAY SOFTWARE The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this chapter. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections: - the real-time operating system - the system services software - the platform software - the protection & control software This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and the protection & control software, which between them control the functional behaviour of the relay. Figure 4 shows the structure of the relay software. Protection & Control Software Disturbance recorder task Programables & fixed scheme logic Protection task Fourier signal processing Protection algorithms Measurements and event, fault & disturbance records Platform Software Protection & control settings Event, fault, disturbance, maintenance record logging Remote communications interface - CEI 60870-5-103 Remote communications interface - Modbus Settings database Local & Remote communications interface - Courier Front panel interface - LCD & keypad Relay hardware System services software Supervisor task Sampling function - copies samples into 2 cycle buffer Sample data & digital logic input Control of output contacts and programmable LEDs Control of interfaces to keypad, LCD, LEDs, front & rear comms ports. Self-checking maintenance records P0128ENa FIGURE 4 - RELAY SOFTWARE STRUCTURE 3.1 Real-time operating system The software is split into tasks; the real-time operating system is used to schedule the processing of the tasks to ensure that they are processed in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible in part for controlling the communication between the software tasks through the use of operating system messages. 3.2 System services software As shown in Figure 4, the system services software provides the interface between the relay’s hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform software and the protection & control software. For example, the system services software provides drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote communication ports, and controls the boot of the processor and downloading of the processor code into SRAM from non-volatile flash EPROM at power up. Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 17/48 3.3 Platform software The platform software has three main functions: - to control the logging of records that are generated by the protection software, including alarms and event, fault, and maintenance records. - to store and maintain a database of all of the relay’s settings in non-volatile memory. - to provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the relay’s user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has been specified (Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3). 3.3.1 Record logging The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance records. The records for all of these incidents are logged in battery backed-up SRAM in order to provide a non-volatile log of what has happened. The relay maintains four logs: one each for up to 96 alarms (with 64 application alarms: 32 alarms in alarm status 1 and another group of 32 alarms in alarm status 2 and 32 alarms platform (see GC annex for mapping), 250 event records, 5 fault records and 5 maintenance records. The logs are maintained such that the oldest record is overwritten with the newest record. The logging function can be initiated from the protection software or the platform software is responsible for logging of a maintenance record in the event of a relay failure. This includes errors that have been detected by the platform software itself or error that are detected by either the system services or the protection software function. See also the section on supervision and diagnostics later in this chapter. 3.3.2 Settings database The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay, including the protection, disturbance recorder and control & support settings. The settings are maintained in non-volatile E2PROM memory. The platform software’s management of the settings database includes the responsibility of ensuring that only one user interface modifies the settings of the database at any one time. This feature is employed to avoid conflict between different parts of the software during a setting change. For changes to protection settings and disturbance recorder settings, the platform software operates a ‘scratchpad’ in SRAM memory. This allows a number of setting changes to be applied to the protection elements, disturbance recorder and saved in the database in E2PROM. (See also chapter 1 on the user interface). If a setting change affects the protection & control task, the database advises it of the new values. 3.3.3 Database interface The other function of the platform software is to implement the relay’s internal interface between the database and each of the relay’s user interfaces. The database of settings and measurements must be accessible from all of the relay’s user interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The platform software presents the data in the appropriate format for each user interface. P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 18/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.4 Protection and control software The protection and control software task is responsible for processing all of the protection elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it has to communicate with both the system services software and the platform software as well as organise its own operations. The protection software has the highest priority of any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the fastest possible protection response. The protection & control software has a supervisor task which controls the start-up of the task and deals with the exchange of messages between the task and the platform software. 3.4.1 Overview - protection and control scheduling After initialisation at start-up, the protection and control task is suspended until there are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is controlled by a ‘sampling function’ which is called by the system services software and takes each set of new samples from the input module and stores them in a two-cycle buffer. The protection and control software resumes execution when the number of unprocessed samples in the buffer reaches a certain number. For the P441-442-444 distance protection relay, the protection task is executed twice per cycle, i.e. after every 24 samples for the sample rate of 48 samples per power cycle used by the relay. The protection and control software is suspended again when all of its processing on a set of samples is complete. This allows operations by other software tasks to take place. 3.4.2 Signal processing The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators and frequency tracking of the analogue signals. The digital inputs are checked against their previous value over a period of half a cycle. Hence a change in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained over at least half a cycle before it is registered with the protection and control software. Transformation & Low Pass Filter ANTI-ALIASING FILTER ANTI-ALIASING FILTER LOW PASS FILTER ONE-SAMPLE DELAY ONE-SAMPLE DELAY FIR DERIVATOR SUB-SAMPLE 1/2 12 Samples per Cycle I f I' f V P3029ENa I V FIR = Impulse Finite Response Filter SUB-SAMPLE 1/2 SUB-SAMPLE 1/2 LOW PASS FILTER Transformation & Low Pass Filter A-D DFT Converter 24 Samples per Cycle FIGURE 5 - SIGNAL ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by detecting a change in the measured signal’s phase angle. The calculated value of the frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input module so as to achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of the power waveform. The value of the frequency is also stored for use by the protection and control task. When the protection and control task is re-started by the sampling function, it calculates the Fourier components for the analogue signals. The Fourier components are calculated using a one-cycle, 24-sample Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The DFT is always calculated using the last cycle of samples from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the most recent data is used. The DFT used in this way extracts the power frequency fundamental component from the signal and produces the magnitude and phase angle of the fundamental in rectangular component format. The DFT provides an accurate measurement of the fundamental frequency component, and effective filtering of harmonic frequencies and noise. This performance is achieved in conjunction with the relay input module which provides hardware anti-alias filtering to attenuate frequencies above the half sample rate, and frequency tracking to maintain a sample rate of 24 samples per cycle. The Fourier components of the input current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they can be accessed by all of the protection elements’ algorithms. The samples from the input module are also used in an Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 19/48 unprocessed form by the disturbance recorder for waveform recording and to calculate true rms values of current, voltage and power for metering purposes. 3.4.3 Programmable scheme logic The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application. This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers. The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators on the input board, the outputs of the protection elements, e.g. protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic. The fixed scheme logic provides the relay’s standard protection schemes. The PSL itself consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be programmed to perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any number of inputs. The timers are used either to create a programmable delay, and/or to condition the logic outputs, e.g. to create a pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front panel of the relay and the output contacts at the rear. The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any of its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the part of the PSL logic that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed. This reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL. The protection and control software updates the logic delay timers and checks for a change in the PSL input signals every time it runs. This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic design. However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very complex system, and because of this setting of the PSL is implemented through the PC support MiCOM S1. 3.4.4 Event and Fault Recording A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal causes an event record to be created. When this happens, the protection and control task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is available to be processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM which is controlled by the supervisor task. When the supervisor task receives either an event or fault record message, it instructs the platform software to create the appropriate log in battery backed-up SRAM. The operation of the record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is slower than the supervisor’s buffer. This means that the protection software is not delayed waiting for the records to be logged by the platform software. However, in the rare case when a large number of records to be logged are created in a short period of time, it is possible that some will be lost if the supervisor’s buffer is full before the platform software is able to create a new log in battery backed-up SRAM. If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of information. 3.4.5 Disturbance recorder The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of 10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection and control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives into the required length disturbance record. With Kbus or ModBus comms, the relay attempts to limit the demands on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition. The compressed records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data. With IEC based protocols no data compression is done. Since C1.x, the disturbance files are no more compressed. This version manage the disturbance task with 24 samples by cycle (since B1x & C1x). Maximum storage capacity is equivalent to 28 events of 3 s which gives a maximum duration of 84 s. 3.4.6 Fault locator The fault locator task is also separate from the protection and control task. The fault locator is invoked by the protection and control task when a fault is detected. The fault locator uses P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 20/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 a 12-cycle buffer of the analogue input signals and returns the calculated location of the fault to the protection and control task wich includes it in the fault record for the fault. When the fault record is complete (i.e. includes the fault location), the protection and control task can send a message to the supervisor task to log the fault record. Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 21/48 4. DISTANCE ALGORITHMS The operation is based on the combined use of two types of algorithms: - "Deltas" algorithms using the superimposed current and voltage values that are characteristic of a fault. These are used for phase selection and directional determination. The fault distance calculation is performed by the "impedance measurement algorithms ” using Gauss-Seidel. - "Conventional" algorithms using the impedance values measured while the fault occurs. These are also used for phase selection and directional determination. The fault distance calculation is performed by the "impedance measurement algorithms." Using Gauss-Seidel. The "Deltas" algorithms have priority over the "Conventional" algorithms if they have been started first. The latter are actuated only if "Deltas" algorithms have not been able to clear the fault within two cycles of its detection. Since version C1.x no priority is managed any more. The fastest algorithm will give the immediate directional decision. 4.1 Distance and Resistance Measurement MiCOM P44x distance protection is a full scheme distance relay. To measure the distance and apparent resistance of a fault, the following equation is solved on the loop with a fault: (n).Z L Relay P3030ENa R F Z SL I L Local Source (1-n).Z L Z SR I R I F = I + I' Remote Source V L = (Z L x I x D)+ R F x I F = ((r +jx) x I x D) +R F x I F where V L V L = local terminal relay voltage r = line resistance (ohm/mile) x = = = = line reactance (ohm/mile) current measured by the relay on the faulty phase current flowing into the fault from local terminal = current flowing into the fault from remote terminal = fault location (permile or km from relay to the fault) current flowing in the fault (I + I') I F I I' R F Assumed Fault Currents: For Phase to Ground Faults (ex., A-N), For Phase to Phase Faults (ex., A-B), I F = 3I 0 I A for 40ms, then after 40 ms I F =I AB Relay V R D = fault resistance = apparent fault resistance at relay; R x (1 + I'/I) R FIGURE 6 - DISTANCE AND FAULT RESISTANCE ESTIMATION The impedance measurements are used by High Speed and Conventional Algorithms. P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 22/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 The following describes how to solve the above equation (determination of D fault distance and R fault resistance). The line model used will be the 3×3 matrix of the symmetrical line impedance (resistive and inductive) of the three phases, and mutual values between phases. Raa + j Laa Rab + j Lab Rac + j Lac Rab + j Lab Rbb + j Lbb Rbc + j Lbc Rac + j Lac Rbc + j Lbc Rcc + j Lcc Where: Raa=Rbb=Rcc and Rab=Rbc=Rac Laa = Lbb = Lcc = 3 . 2 1 n X X  and Lab = Lbc = Lac = 3 1 X X n  and X1 : positive sequence reactance X0 : zero-sequence reactance The line model is obtained from the positive and zero-sequence impedance. The use of four different residual compensation factor settings is permitted on the relay, as follows: kZ1: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zones 1 and 1X. kZ2: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zone 2. kZp: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zone p. kZ3/4: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zones 3 and 4. The solutions "Dfault " and "Rfault " are obtained by solving the system of equations (one equation per step of the calculation) using the Gauss Seidel method. Rfault (n) =      n n0 fault n n0 n n0 fault l 1 fault fault L )² (I ) .I .I (Z . 1) .(n D ) .I (V Dfault (n) =      n n0 l 1 n n0 n n0 fault l 1 fault l 1 L )² .I (Z ) .I .I (Z . 1) .(n R ) .I .Z (V Rfault and Dfault are computed for every sample (24 samples per cycle). NOTE: See also in § 4.3.1 the Rn and Dn (Xn) conditions of convergence. With IL equal to I + k0 x 3I0 for phase-to-earth loop or IL equal to I for phase-to-phase loop. Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 23/48 4.1.1 Phase-to-earth loop impedance P3031ENa V A V B V C Z s Z s i C i A Z 1 Z s i B Z 1 Z 1 V CN V BN V AN k S Z S k 0 Z 1 R Fault Location of Distance Relay R / Phase X / Phase Z Fault Z 1 R Fault / (1+k 0 ) FIGURE 7 - PHASE-TO-EARTH LOOP IMPEDANCE The impedance model for the phase-to-earth loop is : VoN = Z1 x Dfault x (Io + k0 x 3I0) + Rfault x Ifault with o = phase A, B or C The (3I0) current is used for the first 40 milliseconds to model the fault current, thus eliminating the load current before the circuit breakers are operated during the 40ms (one pole tripping). After the 40ms, the phase current is used. V AN = Z 1 .Dfault.(I A +k0 x 3I0)+R fault .I fault V BN = Z 1 .Dfault.(I B +k0 X.3I0)+R fault .I fault V CN = Z 1 .Dfault.(I C +k0 x 3I0)+R fault .I fault x 5 k0 residual compensation factors = 15 phase-to-earth loops are continuously monitored and computed for each samples. P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 24/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 V N = Z 1 .D fault .(I  + k0.3I0) + R fault .I fault V N = Z 1 .D fault .(I  + 3 1 Z Z n  .3I0) + R fault .I fault V N = (R 1 +j.X 1 ).D fault .(I  + ) .( 3 ) _ .( 1 1 1 1 0 jX R X X J R R o    .3I0) + R fault .I fault V N = (R 1 +j.X 1 ).D fault .I  + 3 ) ( 1 0 1 0 X X j R R    .D fault .3I0 + R fault .I fault V N = R 1 .D fault .I  + 3 1 0 R R  .D fault .3I0 + j.X1. D fault .I  + 3 ) ( 1 0 X X j  .D fault .3I0 + R fault .I fault V N = R 1 .D fault .I  + 3 1 0 R R  .D fault .3I0 + j.X1. D fault .I  + 3 ) ( 1 0 X X j  .D fault .(I A +I B +I C ) + R fault .I fault V AN = R 1 .D fault .I A + 3 1 0 R R  .D fault .3I0 + 3 ) . 2 ( 1 0 X X j  .D fault .I A + 3 ) ( 1 0 X X j  .D fault .(I B +I C ) + R fault .I fault V AN = R 1 .D fault .I A + 3 1 0 R R  .D fault .3I0 + 3 . 2 1 0 X X  .D fault . 3 1 0 X X dt dl A   .D fault . 3 1 0 X X dt dl B   + dt dl C .D fault . + R fault .I fault V AN = R 1 .D fault .I A + 3 1 0 R R  .D fault .3I0 + L AA .D fault . dt dl A + L AB .D fault . dt dl B + L AC .D fault . dt dl C + R fault .I fault V BN = R 1 .D fault .I B + 3 1 0 R R  .D fault .3I0 + L AB .D fault . dt dl A + L BB .D fault . dt dl B + L BC .D fault . dt dl C + R fault .I fault V CN = R 1 .D fault .I C + 3 1 0 R R  .D fault .3I0 + L AC .D fault . dt dl A + L BC .D fault . dt dl B + L CC .D fault . dt dl C + R fault .I fault 4.1.2 Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage). Derivative current value (dI/dt) is obtained by using FIR filter. 4.1.3 Phase-to-phase loop impedance P3032ENa R Fault V C Z s Z s Z s i C i B i A Z 1 Z 1 Z 1 V CN V AN Location of Distance Relay R / Phase X / Phase Z Fault Z 1 R Fault / 2 V BN FIGURE 8 - PHASE-TO-PHASE LOOP IMPEDANCE The impedance model for the phase-to-phase loop is : V = ZL x Dfault x I + Rfault /2 x Ifault with  = phase AB, BC or CA Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 25/48 The model for the current Ifault circulating in the fault I. V AB = 2Z 1 .D fault .I AB + R fault .I fault V BC = 2Z 1 .D fault .I BC + R fault .I fault V CA = 2Z 1 .D fault .I CA + R fault .I fault = 3 phase-to-phase loops are continuously monitored and computed for each sample. V  = 2Z 1 .D fault .I  + R fault .I fault V  = 2(R 1 + j. X 1 ).D fault .I  + R fault .I fault V  = 2R 1 .D fault .I  + 2j. X 1 .D fault .I  + R fault .I fault V  = 2R 1 .D fault .I  + 2X 1 .D fault . dt dl  + R fault .I fault V AB = R 1 .D fault .(I A – I B ) + (L AA –L AB ).D fault . dt dl A + (L AB –L BB ).D fault . dt dl B + (L AC –L BC ).D fault . dt dl C + 2 fault R .I fault V BC = R 1 .D fault .(I B – I C ) + (L AB –L AC ).D fault . dt dl A + (L BB –L BC ).D fault . dt dl B + (L BC –L CC ).D fault . dt dl C + 2 fault R .I fault V CA = R 1 .D fault .(I C – I A ) + (L AC –L AA ).D fault . dt dl A + (L BC –L AB ).D fault . dt dl B + (L CC –L AC ).D fault . dt dl C + 2 fault R .I fault Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage). Derivative current value (dI/dt) is obtained by using FIR filter. 4.2 "Delta" Algorithms The patented high-speed algorithm has been proven with 10 years of service at all voltage levels from MV to EHV networks. The P440 relay has ultimate reliability of phase selection and directional decision far superior to standard distance techniques using superimposed algorithms. These algorithms or delta algorithms are based on transient components and they are used for the following functions which are computed in parallel: Detection of the fault By comparing the superimposed values to a threshold which is low enough to be crossed when a fault occurs and high enough not to be crossed during normal switching outside of the protected zones. Establishing the fault direction Only a fault can generate superimposed values; therefore, it is possible to determine direction by measuring the transit direction of the superimposed energy. Phase selection As the superimposed values no longer include the load currents, it is possible to make high- speed phase selection. P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 26/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay Relay Relay Relay R F R F R F Relay Relay R F R F R F Z S Z L Z R Unfaulted Network (steady state prefault conditions) V R I R Z L Z S Z L Z R V R I R Fault Inception P3033ENa Z L V F (prefault voltage) -V F Z L R F R F Z S Z L Z R V R ' I R ' Faulted Network (steady state) V R I R = Voltage at Relay Location Current at Relay Location Voltage at Relay Location Current at Relay Location Voltage at Relay Location Current at Relay Location = = V R ' = = = I R ' V R R I V R I R V R ' I R ' V R I R FIGURE 9 - PRE, FAULT AND FAULT INCEPTION VALUE Network Status Monitoring The network status is monitored continuously to determine whether the "Deltas" algorithms may be used. To do so, the network must be "healthy," which is characterised by the following: - The circuit breaker(s) should be closed just prior to fault inception (2 cycles of healthy pre-fault data should be stored) – the line is energised from one or both ends, - The source characteristics should not change noticeably (there is no power swing or out-of-step detected). - Power System Frequency is being measured and tracked (48 samples per cycle at 50 or 60Hz). Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 27/48 No fault is detected : - all nominal phase voltages are between 70% and 130% of the nominal value. - the residual voltage (3V0) is less than 10% of the nominal value - the residual current (3I0) is less than 10% of the nominal value + 3.3% of the maximum load current flowing on the line The measured loop impedance are outside the characteristic, when these requirements are fulfilled, the superimposed values are used to determine the fault inception (start), faulty phase selection and fault direction. The network is then said to be "healthy" before the fault occurrence. 4.2.2 Detecting a Transition In order to detect a transition, the MiCOM P441, P442 and P444 compares sampled current and voltage values at the instant "t" with the values predicted from those stored in the memory one period and two periods earlier. G Time P3034ENa t-2T t-T t T 2T G(t-2T) G(t-T) G(t) Gp(t) G = C u r r e n t o r V o l t a g e FIGURE 10 - TRANSITION DETECTION Gp(t) = 2G(t-T) - G(t-2T) where Gp(t) are the predicted values of either the sampled current or voltage A transition is detected on one of the current or voltage input values if the absolute value of (G(t) - Gp(t)) exceeds a threshold of 0.2 x IN (nominal current) or 0.1 x UN / \3 = 0.1x VN (nominal voltage) With: U = line-to-line voltage V = line-to-ground voltage = U / \3 G(t) = G(t) - Gp(t) is the transition value of the reading G. The high-speed algorithms will be started if U OR I is detected on one sample. P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 28/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Example: isolated AC fault Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 29/48 P44x/EN HW/H75 Relay Description Page 30/48 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.2.3 Confirmation In order to eliminate the transitions generated by possible operations or by high frequencies, the transition detected over a succession of three sampled values is confirmed by checking for at least one loop for which the two following conditions are met: - V > threshold V, where threshold V = 0.1 Un /\3 = 0.1 Vn and - I > threshold l, where threshold I = 0.2 In. The start-up of the high-speed algorithms will be confirmed if U AND I are detected on three consecutive samples. 4.2.4 Directional Decision The "Delta" detection of the fault direction is determined from the sign of the energy per Phase for the transition values characterising the fault. Relay Z L Z S Z L Z R Reverse Fault P3035ENa -V F R F Voltage at Relay Location Current at Relay Location = = V R R I V R R I R Relay Z L Z S Z L Z R Forward Fault -V F R F Voltage at Relay Location Current at Relay Location = = V R R I V R F I R FIGURE 11 - DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING SUPERIMPOSED VALUES To do this, the following sum per phase is calculated: SA = SB = SC = ) I . V ( 5 n0 ni n0 A AN i i ¿ + > A A ) I . V ( 5 n0 ni n0 B BN i i ¿ + > A A ) I . V ( 5 n0 ni n0 C CN i i ¿ + > A A Where no is the instant at which the fault is detected, ni is the instant of the calculation and S is the calculated transition energy. If the fault is in the forward direction, then S i 0. The directional criterion is valid if S >5 x (10% x Vn x 20% x In x cos (85° ) This sum is calculated on five successive samples. RCA angle of the delta algorithms is equal to 60° (-30°) if the protected line is not serie compensated (else RCA is equal to 0°). Relay Description P44x/EN HW/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 31/48 4.2.5 Phase Selection Phase selection is made on the basis of a comparison between the transition values for the derivatives of currents IA, IB and IC: AI'A, AI'B, AI'C, AI'AB, AI'BC, AI'CA NOTE: The derivatives of the currents are used to eliminate the effects of the DC current component. Hence: ¿ + > A = 4 0 0 i A AN )² ' ( S n ni n I ¿ + > A = 4 0 0 i AB )² ' ( S n ni n AB I ¿ + > A = 4 0 0 i B BN )² ' ( S n ni n I ¿ + > A = 4 0 0 i BC )² ' ( S n ni n BC I ¿ + > A = 4 0 0 i C CN )² ' ( S n ni n I ¿ + > A = 4 0 0 i CA )² ' ( S n ni n CA I The phase selection is valid if the sum (SAB+SBC+SCA) is higher than a threshold. This sum is not valid if the positive sequence impedance on the source side is far higher than the zero sequence impedance. In this case, the conventional algorithms are used to select the faulted phase(s). Sums on one-phase and two-phase loops are performed. The relative magnitudes of these sums determine the faulted phase(s). For examples, assume : If SAB3 &IN>4 248 7.6 New Function Description: THERMAL OVERLOAD 249 7.6.1 Single time constant characteristic 250 7.6.2 Dual time constant characteristic (Typically not applied for MiCOMho P443) 250 7.6.3 Setting guidelines 251 7.7 New Function Description: PAP (RTE feature) 252 7.8 New Elements : Miscellaneous features 253 7.8.1 HOTKEYS / Control input 253 7.8.2 Optos : Dual hysteresis and filter removed or not 256 7.9 New Elements : PSL features 257 7.9.1 DDB Cells: 257 7.9.2 New Tools in S1 & PSL: Toolbar and Commands 258 7.9.3 MiCOM Px40 GOOSE editor 263 7.10 New Function : Inter MiCOM features 273 Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 7/294 7.10.1 InterMiCOM Teleprotection 273 7.10.2 Protection Signalling 273 7.10.3 Functional Assignment 277 7.10.4 InterMiCOM Settings 278 7.10.5 TESTING InterMiCOM Teleprotection 281 8. NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION C4.X (MODEL 0350J) 284 8.1 New DDB signals 284 9. NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION D1.X (MODEL 0400K) 286 9.1 Programmable function keys and tricolour LEDs 286 9.2 Setting guidelines 286 10. NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION C5.X (MODEL 0360J) 290 10.1 New DDB signals 290 10.2 Residual overvoltage (neutral displacement) protection 292 10.2.1 Setting guidelines 294 10.3 CT polarity setting 294 P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 8/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 9/294 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Protection of overhead lines and cable circuits Overhead lines are amongst the most fault susceptible items of plant in a modern power system. It is therefore essential that the protection associated with them provides secure and reliable operation. For distribution systems, continuity of supply is of para mount importance. The majority of faults on overhead lines are transient or semi-permanent in nature, and multi-shot autoreclose cycles are commonly used in conjunction with instantaneous tripping elements to increase system availability. Thus, high speed, fault clearance is often a fundamental requirement of any protection scheme on a distribution network. The protection requirements for sub-transmission and higher voltage systems must also take into account system stability. Where systems are not highly interconnected the use of single phase tripping and high speed autoreclosure is commonly used. This in turn dictates the need for high speed protection to reduce overall fault clearance times. Underground cables are vulnerable to mechanical damage, such as disturbance by construction work or ground subsidence. Also, faults can be caused by ingress of ground moisture into the cable insulation, or its buried joints. Fast fault clearance is essential to limit extensive damage, and avoid the risk of fire, etc. Many power systems use earthing arrangements designed to limit the passage of earth fault current. Methods such as resistance earthing make the detection of earth faults difficult. Special protection elements are often used to meet such onerous protection requirements. Physical distance must also be taken into account. Overhead lines can be hundreds of kilometres in length. If high speed, discriminative protection is to be applied it will be necessary to transfer information between the line ends. This not only puts the onus on the security of signalling equipment but also on the protection in the event of loss of this signal. Thus, backup protection is an important feature of any protection scheme. In the event of equipment failure, maybe of signalling equipment or switchgear, it is necessary to provide alternative forms of fault clearance. It is desirable to provide backup protection which can operate with minimum time delay and yet discriminate with the main protection and protection elsewhere on the system. 1.2 MiCOM distance relay MiCOM relays are a range of products from ALSTOM Grid. Using advanced numerical technology, MiCOM relays include devices designed for application to a wide range of power system plant such as motors, generators, feeders, overhead lines and cables. Each relay is designed around a common hardware and software platform in order to achieve a high degree of commonality between products. One such product in the range is the series of distance relays. The relay series has been designed to cater for the protection of a wide range of overhead lines and underground cables from distribution to transmission voltage levels. The relay also includes a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid with power system diagnosis and fault analysis. All these features can be accessed remotely from one of the relays remote serial communications options. P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 10/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.2.1 Protection Features The distance relays offer a comprehensive range of protection functions, for application to many overhead line and underground cable circuits. There are 3 separate models available, the P441, P442 and P444. The P442 and P444 models can provide single and three pole tripping. The P441 model provides three pole tripping only. The protection features of each model are summarised below: - 21G/21P : Phase and earth fault distance protection, each with up to 5 independent zones of protection (6 zones from version C5.0, model 36J). Standard and customised signalling schemes are available to give fast fault clearance for the whole of the protected line or cable. - 50/51 : Instantaneous and time delayed overcurrent protection - Four elements are available, with independent directional control for the 1 st and 2 nd element. The 3 rd element can be used for SOFT/TOR logic. The fourth element can be configured for stub bus protection in 1½ circuit breaker arrangements. - 50N/51N : Instantaneous and time delayed neutral overcurrent protection. Two elements are available (four elements from version C1.0, model 020G or 020H). - 67N : Directional earth fault protection (DEF) - This can be configured for channel aided protection, plus two elements are available for backup DEF. - 32N : Maximum of Residual Power Protection - Zero sequence Power Protection This element provides protection for high resistance faults, eliminated without communication channel. - 27 : Undervoltage Protection - Two stage, configurable as either phase to phase or phase to neutral measuring. Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 is DT only. - 49 : (Since version C2.X) Thermal overload Protection - with dual time constant. This element provides separate alarm and trip thresholds. - 59 : Overvoltage Protection - Two stages, configurable as either phase to phase or phase to neutral measuring. Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 is DT only. - 67/46 : Directional or non-directional negative sequence overcurrent protection - This element can provide backup protection for many unbalanced fault conditions. - 50/27 : Switch on to fault (SOTF) protection - These settings enhance the protection applied for manual circuit breaker closure. - 50/27 :Trip on reclose (TOR) protection - These settings enhance the protection applied on autoreclosure of the circuit breaker. - 78 – 68 : Power swing blocking - Selective blocking of distance protection zones ensures stability during the power swings experienced on sub-transmission and transmission systems (stable swing or Out of Step condition = loss of synchronism). From version C1.0, the relay can differentiate between a stable power swing and a loss of synchronism (out of steps). - VTS : Voltage transformer supervision (VTS). - To detect VT fuse failures. This prevents maloperation of voltage dependent protection on AC voltage input failure. - CTS : Current transformer supervision - To raise an alarm should one or more of the connections from the phase CTs become faulty. - 46 BC : Broken conductor detection - To detect network faults such as open circuits, where a conductor may be broken but not in contact with another conductor or the earth. - 50 BF : Circuit breaker failure protection - Generally set to backtrip upstream circuit breakers, should the circuit breaker at the protected terminal fail to trip. Two stages are provided. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 11/294 1.2.2 Non-Protection Features The P441, P442 and P444 relays have the following non-protection features: - 79/25 : Autoreclosure with Check synchronism - This permits up to 4 reclose shots, with voltage synchronism, differential voltage, live line/dead bus, and dead bus/live line interlocking available. Check synchronism is optional. - Measurements - Selected measurement values polled at the line/cable terminal, available for display on the relay or accessed from the serial communications facility. - Fault/Event/Disturbance Records - Available from the serial communications or on the relay display (fault and event records only). - Distance to fault locator - Reading in km, miles or % of line length. - Four Setting Groups - Independent setting groups to cater for alternative power system arrangements or customer specific applications. - Remote Serial Communications - To allow remote access to the relays. The following communications protocols are supported: Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5/103 and DNP3 (UCA2 soon available). - Continuous Self Monitoring - Power on diagnostics and self checking routines to provide maximum relay reliability and availability. - Circuit Breaker State Monitoring - Provides indication of any discrepancy between circuit breaker auxiliary contacts. - Circuit Breaker Control - Opening and closing of the circuit breaker can be achieved either locally via the user interface / opto inputs, or remotely via serial communications. - Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring - Provides records / alarm outputs regarding the number of CB operations, sum of the interrupted current and the breaker operating time. - Commissioning Test Facilities. 1.2.3 Additional Features for the P441 Relay Model - 8 Logic Inputs - For monitoring of the circuit breaker and other plant status. - 14 Output relay contacts - For tripping, alarming, status indication and remote control. 1.2.4 Additional Features for the P442 Relay Model - Single pole tripping and autoreclose. - Real Time Clock Synchronisation - Time synchronisation is possible from the relay IRIG-B input. (IRIG-B must be specified as an option at time of order). - Fibre optic converter for IEC60870-5/103 communication (optional). - Second rear port in COURIER Protocol (KBus/RS232/RS485) - 16 Logic Inputs - For monitoring of the circuit breaker and other plant status. - 21 Output relay contacts - For tripping, alarming, status indication and remote control. P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 12/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.2.5 Additional Features for the P444 Relay Model - Single pole tripping and autoreclose. - Real Time Clock Synchronisation - Time synchronisation is possible from the relay IRIG-B input. (IRIG-B must be specified as an option at time of order). - Fibre optic converter for IEC60870-5/103 communication (optional). - Second rear port in COURIER Protocol (KBus/RS232/RS485) - 24 Logic Inputs - For monitoring of the circuit breaker and other plant status. - 32 Output relay contacts - For tripping, alarming, status indication and remote control. 1.3 Remark The PSL screen copy extracted from S1, uses the different types of model P44x (07, 09…). (See the DDB equivalent table with the different model number). Example : check synch OK (model 07) = DDB204 check synch OK (model 09) = DDB236 - It is recommended to check in the DDB table, the reference number of each cell, included in the chapter P44x/EN GC/E33 (“Relay menu Data base”) - Version C2.x uses the model 030 G / 030 H / 030 J Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 13/294 2. APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may be applied. Each section also gives an extract from the respective menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are applied to the relay. The P441, P442 and P444 relays each include a column in the menu called the ‘CONFIGURATION’ column. As this affects the operation of each of the individual protection functions, it is described in the following section. 2.1 Configuration column (“Configuration” menu) The following table shows the Configuration column:- Menu text Default setting Available settings CONFIGURATION Restore Defaults No Operation No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Setting Group Select via Menu Select via Menu Select via Optos Active Settings Group 1 Group1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Save Changes No Operation No Operation Save Abort Copy From Group 1 Group1,2,3 or 4 Copy To No Operation No Operation Group1,2,3 or 4 Setting Group 1 Enabled Enabled or Disabled Setting Group 2 Disabled Enabled or Disabled Setting Group 3 Disabled Enabled or Disabled Setting Group 4 Disabled Enabled or Disabled Distance Protection Enabled Enabled or Disabled Power Swing Enabled Enabled or Disabled Back-up I> Disabled Enabled or Disabled Neg Sequence O/C Disabled Enabled or Disabled Broken Conductor Disabled Enabled or Disabled Earth Fault O/C Disabled Enabled or Disabled Earth fault prot ( 4 ) (ZSP) Disabled Enabled or Disabled Aided DEF Enabled Enabled or Disabled Volt Protection Disabled Enabled or Disabled CB Fail & I< Enabled Enabled or Disabled Supervision Enabled Enabled or Disabled P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 14/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Menu text Default setting Available settings System Checks Disabled Enabled or Disabled Thermal Overload ( 3 ) Disabled Enabled or Disabled I< Protection (5) Disabled Enabled or Disabled Residual O/V NVD ( 4 ) Disabled Enabled or Disabled Freq protection (5) Disabled Enabled or Disabled Internal A/R Disabled Enabled or Disabled Input Labels Visible Invisible or Visible Output Labels Visible Invisible or Visible CT & VT Ratios Visible Invisible or Visible Record Control Invisible Invisible or Visible Disturb Recorder Invisible Invisible or Visible Measure’t Setup Invisible Invisible or Visible Comms Settings Visible Invisible or Visible Commission Tests Visible Invisible or Visible Setting Values Primary Primary or Secondary Control Inputs ( 3 ) Visible Invisible or Visible Ctrl I/P Config ( 3 ) Visible Invisible or Visible Ctrl I/P Labels ( 3 ) Visible Invisible or Visible Direct Access ( 3 ) Enabled Enabled or Disabled Inter MiCOM ( 2 ) Enabled Enabled or Disabled Ethernet NCIT ( 3 ) Visible Visible / Invisible Function key ( 3 ) Visible Visible / Invisible LCD Control 11 1 – 31 ( 1 ) Since B1.0 ( 2 ) Since C1.0 ( 3 ) Since C2.0 ( 4 ) Since D1.0 ( 5 ) Since D3.0 The aim of the Configuration column is to allow general configuration of the relay from a single point in the menu. Any of the functions that are disabled or made invisible from this column do not then appear within the main relay menu. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 15/294 2.2 Phase fault distance protection The P441, P442 and P444 relays have 6 zones of phase fault protection, as shown in the impedance plot Figure 1 below. ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 2 ZONE 1X ZONE 1 ZONE P R1Ph/2 R2Ph/2 RpPh/2 R3Ph/2 = R4Ph/2 P0470ENa X ( /phase) R ( /phase) FIGURE 1A – PHASE/PHASE FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS (Ω/PHASE SCHEME) Since version C2.X, the previous phase fault protection is completed by optional TILT characteristic (Z1p manages the TILT characteristic for phase fault). ZONE 1 R1Ph/2 R2Ph/2 RpPh/2 R3Ph/2 =R4Ph/2 P0470ENb ZONE 1X ZONE 2 ZONE P ZONE 3 X ( /phase) W R ( /phase) W ZONE 4 ZONE Q FIGURE 1B – PHASE/PHASE FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS (Ω/PHASE SCHEME) Remarks: 1. Z1 (zone 1) programmed in ohm/loop. R limit value in MiCOM S1 is in ohms loop and Z limit in MiCOM S1 is in ohms phase. 2. In a O/phase scheme the R value must be divided by 2 (for phase/phase diagram). 3. The angle of the start element (Quad) is the angle of the positive impedance of the line (value adjusted in the settings) 4. TILT angle protection is only applied with conventional protection P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 16/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 All phase fault protection elements are quadrilateral shaped, and are directionalied as follows: - Zones 1, 2 and 3 - Directional forward zones, as used in conventional three zone distance schemes. Note that Zone 1 can be extended to Zone 1X when required in zone 1 extension schemes (see page 17 §2.5.2). - Zone p and q - Programmable. Selectable in MiCOM S1 (Distance scheme\Fault type) as a directional forward or reverse zone. - Zone 4 - Directional reverse zone. Note that zone 3 and zone 4 can be set with same Rloop value to provide a general start of the relay. Remark: If any zone i presents an Rloop i bigger than R3=R4, the limit of the start is always given by R3. See also the "Commissioning Test" chapter. 2.3 Earth fault distance protection The P441, P442 and P444 relays have 6 zones of earth (ground) fault protection, as shown in the earth loop impedance plot Figure 2 below. Type of fault can be selected in MiCOM S1 (only Phase/Phase or P/P & P/Ground) R4G = P0471ENa R3G RpG R2G R1G ZONE 3 ZONE 1 ZONE P Reverse ZONE 4 ZONE 1X ZONE 2 ZONE P (Programmable) X ( /phase) R ( /phase) 1+K Z 1 1+K Z 2 1+K Z p 1+K Z 3/4 1+K Z 3/4 FIGURE 2A – PHASE/GROUND FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS (Ω/PHASE SCHEME) Since version C2.X, the previous phase fault protection is completed by optional TILT characteristic (Z1m manages the TILT characteristic for phase fault). Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 17/294 ZONE 1 P0471ENb ZONE 1X ZONE 2 ZONE P ZONE 3 X ( /phase) W R ( /phase) W ZONE 4 ZONE Q 1 Z K 1 R1G + 1 Z K 1 R2G + 1 Z K 1 R3G + = 1 Z K 1 R4G + 1 Z K 1 RpG + FIGURE 2B – PHASE/GROUND FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS (Ω/PHASE SCHEME) Remarks: 1. In a O/phase scheme the R value must be divided by 1+K Z (for phase/ground diagram) 2. The angle of the start element (Quad) is the angle of the 2Z 1 +Z 0 (Z 1 : positive sequence Z, Z 0 : zero sequence Z) 3. See calculation of K Z in section 2.6.5. All earth fault protection elements are quadrilateral shaped, and are directionalised as per the phase fault elements. The reaches of the earth fault elements use residual compensation of the corresponding phase fault reach. The residual compensation factors are as follows: - kZ1 - For zone 1 and zone 1X; - kZ2 - For zone 2; - kZ3/4 - Shared by zones 3 and 4; - kZp - For zone p; - kZq - For zone q. 2.4 Consistency between zones In order to understand how the different distance zones interact the parameters below should be considered: - If Zp is a forward zone ÷ Z1  Z2 < Zp < Z3 ÷ tZ1 < tZ2 < tZp < tZ3 ÷ R1G < R2G < RpG < R3G = R4G ÷ R1Ph < R1extPh < R2Ph < RpPh < R3Ph P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 18/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 - If Zp is a reverse zone ÷ Z1 < Z2 < Z3 ÷ Zp > Z4 ÷ tZ1 < tZ2 < tZ3 ÷ tZp < tZ4 ÷ R1G < R2G < R3G ÷ RpG < R3G = R4G ÷ R1Ph < R2Ph < R3Ph ÷ RpPh < R3Ph = R4Ph ÷ R3G < U N / (1.2 X \3 I N ) ÷ R3Ph < U N / (1.2 X \3 I N ) Remarks: 1. If Z3 is disabled, the forward limit element becomes the smaller zone Z2 (or Zp if selected forward) 2. If Z4 is disabled, the directional limit for the forward zone is: 30° (since version A4.0) 0° (versions older than A4.0) Conventional rules are used as follows: ÷ Distance timers are initiated as soon as the relay has picked up – CVMR pickup distance (CVMR = Start & Convergence) ÷ The minimum tripping time even with carrier received is T1. Since version C5.0 (model 36J) this applies only for standard distance scheme, while in teleprotection schemes minimum tripping time is separately settable. ÷ Zone 4 is always reverse 2.5 General Distance Trip logic 2.5.1 Equation Z1'.T1. BZ1 . PZ1 + Z1x'.(None + Z1xSiAnomTac.UNB_Alarm).[ T1. INP_Z1EXT] + UNB_CR.T1.[ PZ1.Z1'+PZ2.Z2'+PFwd.Aval’] + UNB_CR .T1.(Tp +INP_COS(*)).[ Z1'.BZ1 + (Z2'.BZ2. INP_COS (*)]Error! Bookmark not defined.) + T2 [ Z2' + PZ1.Z1' + BZ1.Z1'] + Z3'.T3 + Zp' .Tzp + Zq' .Tzq + Z4'.T4 [(*) from version A2.10 & A3.1] (See Figure 3 in section 2.7.2.1- Z’ logic description) Remarks: 1. In case of COS (carrier out of service), the logic swap back to a basic scheme. 2. In the column Data Type:"Configuration" means MiCOM S1 Setting (the parameter is present in the settings). 3. The inputs Z1X must be polarised for activating Z1X the logic. 4 For the 1P – 3P trip logic check in section 2.8.3.5 Tripping logic. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 19/294 With the inputs/outputs described above: 2.5.2 Inputs Data Type Description T1 to T4 Internal logic Elapse of Distance Timer 1 to 4 (T1/T2/T3/TZp/T4) Tp Internal logic Elapse of transmission time in blocking scheme Z1' to Z4' (*) Internal logic Detection of fault in zones 1 to 4 (lock out by PSWing or Rev Guard) – See figure 3 section 2.7.21 Forward’ Internal logic Fwd Fault Detection l (lockout by reversal guard) UNB_CR Internal logic Carrier Received INP_COS TS Opto Carrier Out of Service None Configuration Scheme without carrier PZ1 Configuration Permissive scheme Z1 PZ2 Configuration Permissive scheme Z2 PFwd Configuration Permissive Scheme with directional Fwd BZ1 Configuration Blocking scheme Z1 BZ2 Configuration Blocking scheme Z2 INP_Z1EXT Internal logic Zone extension (digital input assigned to an opto by dedicated PSL) Z1xChannel Fail Configuration Z1x logic enabled if channel fail detected (Carrier out of service = COS) UNBAlarm Internal logic Carrier Out Of Service (*) the use of an apostrophe in the above logic (Z'1) is explained in section 2.7.2.1 Figure 3 2.5.3 Outputs Data Type Description PDist_Dec Internal logic Distance protection Trip CSZ1 Configuration Carrier send in case of zone 1 decision CSZ2 Configuration Carrier send in case of zone 2 decision CSZ4 Configuration Carrier send in case of zone 4 decision (Reverse) 2.6 Type of trip Single Pole Z1 Single pole Z2 T1 T2 Tzp T3 T4 0 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 0 1 3 3 3 3 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 1 : Trip 1P if selected in MiCOM S1 otherwise trip 3P 3 : Trip 3P P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 20/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.6.1 Inputs Data Type Description INP_Dist_Timer_Block TS opto Input for blocking the distance function Single Pole T1 Configuration Trip 1pole at T1 – 3P in other cases Single Pole T1 & T2 Configuration Trip 1pole at T1 /T2 – 3P in other cases PDist_Trip Internal Logic Trip by Distance protection T1 to T4 Internal Logic End of distance timer by Zone Fault A Internal Logic Phase A selection Fault B Internal Logic Phase B selection Fault C Internal Logic Phase C selection 2.6.2 Outputs Data Type Description PDist_Trip A Internal Logic Trip Order phase A PDist_Trip B Internal Logic Trip Order phase B PDist_Trip C Internal Logic Trip Order phase C 2.7 Distance zone settings (“Distance” menu) NOTE: Individual distance protection zones can be enabled or disabled by means of the Zone Status function links. Setting the relevant bit to 1 will enable that zone, setting bits to 0 will disable that distance zone. Note that zone 1 is always enabled, and that zones 2 and 4 will need to be enabled if required for use in channel aided schemes. Remarks: 1. .Z3 disable means Fwd start becomes Zp .Z3 & Zp Fwd disable means Fwd start becomes Z2 .Z3 & Zp Fwd & Z2 disable means Fwd start becomes Z1 2. Z4 disable (see remark 1/2/3 in section 2.4) Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 21/294 2.7.1 Settings table Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size GROUP 1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS LINE SETTING Line Length 1000 km (625 miles) 0.3 km (0.2 mile) 1000 km (625 miles) 0.010 km (0.005 mile) Line Impedance 12/In O 0.001/In O 500/In O 0.001/In O Line Angle 70° –90° +90° 0.1° Zone Setting Zone Status 110110 Bit 0: Z1X Enable, Bit 1: Z2 Enable, Bit 2: Zone P Enable, Bit 3: Zone Q Enable (since version D2.0), Bit 4: Z3 Enable, Bit 5: Z4 Enable. KZ1 Res Comp 1 0 7 0.001 KZ1 Angle 0° 0° 360° 0.1° Z1 10/In O 0.001/In O 500/In O 0.001/In O Z1X 15/In O 0.001/In O 500/In O 0.001/In O R1G 10/In O 0 400/In O 0.01/In O R1Ph 10/In O 0 400/In O 0.01/In O tZ1 0 0 10s 0.002s KZ2 Res Comp 1 0 7 0.001 KZ2 Angle 0° 0° 360° 0.1° Z2 20/In O 0.001/In O 500/In O 0.001/In O R2G 20/In O 0 400/In O 0.01/In O R2Ph 20/In O 0 400/In O 0.01/In O tZ2 0.2s 0 10s 0.01s KZ3/4 Res Comp 1 0 7 0.01 KZ3/4 Angle 0° 0° 360° 0.1° Z3 30/In O 0.001/In O 500/In O 0.001/In O R3G - R4G 30/In O 0 400/In O 0.01/In O R3Ph - R4Ph 30/In O 0 400/In O 0.01/In O tZ3 0.6s 0 10s 0.01s Z4 40/In O 0.001/In O 500/In O 0.01/In O tZ4 1s 0 10s 0.01s Zone P - Direct. Directional Fwd Directional Fwd or Directional Rev KZp Res Comp 1 0 7 0.001 KZp Angle 0° 0° 360° 0.1° P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 22/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min Max Zp 25/In O 0.001/In O 500/In O 0.001/In O RpG 25/In O 0 400/In O 0.01/In O RpPh 25/In O 0 400/In O 0.01/In O tZp 0.4s 0 10s 0.01s Zone Q – Direct (since D2.0) Directional Fwd Directional Fwd or Directional Rev KZq Res Comp) 1 0 7 0.001 KZq Angle 0° -180° 180° 0.1° Zq 27*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 RqG 27*V1/I1 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 RqPh 27*V1/I1 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 ( s i n c e v e r s i o n D 2 . 0 ) tZq 0.5s 0 10s 0.01s Serial Cmp.line (*) Disable Enable Disable Overlap Z Mode (*) Disable Enable Disable Z1m Tilt Angle 0° -45° 45° 1° Z1p Tilt Angle 0° -45° 45° 1° Z2/Zp/Zq Tilt Angle 0° -45° 45° 1° ( s i n c e C 2 . x ) Fwd Z Chgt Delay 30ms 0 100ms 1ms Umem Validity 10s 0 10s 10mss Earth Detect 0.05*I1 0*I1 0.1*I1 0.01*I1 Fault Locator KZm Mutual Comp 0 0 7 0.001 KZm Angle 0° 0° 360° 0.1° Since version C2.x: ÷ Addition of a settable time delay to prevent maloperation due to zone evolution from zone n to zone n-1 by CB operation ÷ Addition of a tilt characteristic for zone 1 (independent setting for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase). Settable between ± 45° ÷ Addition of a tilt characteristic for zone 2 and zone P (common setting for phase-to- ground and phase-to-phase/Z2 and Zp). Settable between ± 45° Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 23/294 ÷ DDB associated: Since version C5.X, a new setting is added to set the duration of the voltage memory availability after fault detection. When the voltage memory is declared unavailable (e.g. the V Mem Validity set duration has expired, SOTF Mode, no healthy network to record memory voltage), other polarizing quantities can be considered. These include zero, negative and positive sequence (if voltage is sufficient). Otherwise directional decision is forced to forward. Zone q is a further distance zone. It can be faster or slower than any other zone (except zone 1), and it can be in either direction. The only constraint is that it must be inside the overall Z3/Z4 start-up zone. The residual current threshold (Earth I Detect.) used by the conventional algorithm to detect earth faults is now settable. Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size V Mem Validity 10.00 s 0 s 10.00 s 0.01 s ZoneQ - Direct Directional FWD Directional FWD/ Directional REV kZq Res Comp 1.000 0 7.000 0.001 kZq Angle 0 deg -180.0 180.0 0.1 Zq 27.00 Ohm 0.001 500.0 0.001 RqG 27.00 Ohm 0 400.0 0.010 RqPh 27.00 Ohm 0 400.0 0.010 tZq 500.0ms 0 10.00 0.010 Earth I Detect. 0.05 0 0.10 0.01 Serial Cmp. Line Enabled Overlap Z Mode Enabled (*) Z1m Tilt Angle 20,00 deg (*) Z1p Tilt Angle 20,00 deg (*) Z2/Zp Tilt Angle 20,00 deg (*) Fwd Z Chgt Delay 30,00 ms (*) parameters available from version C2.0 onwards Remark: New settings from C1.x dealing with the tilt and the evolving forward zone detection to zone1 (to avoid a Z1 detection in case of impedance locus getting out from the quad (due to remote CB operating) but crossing the Z1 before being out from the quad (with enough points that a Z1 decision can be confirmed if that timer has been set to 0ms). P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 24/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 - Serial Compensated Line : If enabled, the Directional Line used in the Delta Algorithms is set at 90° (Fwd = Quad1&4 / Rev = Quad 2&3) P0472ENa X R FWD REV FWD REV - If disabled, the Directional Line of the Delta algorithms is set at -30° like conventional algorithms P0473ENa X R FWD REV FWD -30˚ FWD REV - Overlap Z Mode: If enable, for a fault in Zp (fwd), then Z1 & Z2 will be displayed in LCD/Events/Drec – The internal logic is not modified 2.7.2 Zone Logic Applied Normally the zone logic used by the distance algorithm is as below: Z1' P0462XXa Z2' Z4' (with overlap logic the Z2 will cover also the Z1) Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 25/294 2.7.2.1 Zone Logic The relay internal logic will modify the zones & directionality under the following conditions: - Power swing detection - Settings about blocking logic during Power swing - Reversal Guard Timer - Type of teleprotection scheme For Power swing, two signals are considered: - Presence of power swing - Unblocking during power swing During Power swing the zones are blocked; but can be unblocked with: - Start of unblocking logic - Unblocking logic enable in MiCOM S1 on the concerned zone or all zones During the reversal guard logic (in case of parallel lines with overreaching teleprotection scheme - Z1x>ZL), the reverse direction decision is latched (until that timer is elapsed) from the change from reverse to forward fault direction. P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 26/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 P0474ENa ≥ 1 Z2' Z3' Forward' ≥ 1 Z1x' Zp' Z4' Z1' & & & & ≥ 1 & unblock PS in Z1 unblock PS in Z2 Z1x Z1 Z4 PermFwd Zp_Fwd Forward ≥ 1 Power Swing Unblock PS & Z3 Z2 Z13 enabled SOTF Delay 110s 10.00s 3600s 1s Z1 Ext. on Chan. Fail Disabled Disabled or Enabled Weak Infeed WI: Mode Status Disabled Disabled, Echo, WI Trip & Echo. WI: Single Pole Disabled Disabled, Enabled WI: V< Thres. 45V 10V 70V 5V WI: Trip Time Delay 0.06s 0 1s 0.002s PAP: Del Trip En Disabled Disabled, Enabled PAP: P1 / P2 / P3 Disabled Disabled, Enabled PAP: 1P / 2P / 3P Time Del 500 ms 100ms 1500s 100.0ms PAP: IN Thres 500 mA 100mA 1A 10mA PAP: K (%Vn) 500 e-3 500e-3 1.000 50e-3 Loss of Load LoL: Mode Status Disabled Disabled or Enabled LoL: Chan. Fail Disabled Disabled or Enabled LoL: I< 0.5 x In 0.05 x In 1 x In 0.05 x In LoL: Window 0.04s 0.01s 0.1s 0.01s P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 38/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.8.3 Carrier send & Trip logic 2.8.3.1 Carrier send can be triggered by - Zone1 (CSZ1) - Zone2 (CSZ2) - Zone4 Reverse (CSZ4) Remarks: 1. CSZ1 means: "carrier send if Z1 detected" 2. The carrier send in Z4 is managed by "Reverse", instead of Z4 (because Reverse decision starts quicker than Z4). The zones decision logic is described as below: P0476XXa Z1' Z2' Z2'(*) Z4' Remark: Z2'(*) if overlapping zone enabled in MiCOM S1 PDist-CS = (Z1' + Z2').CSZ2 + Z1'.CSZ1 + Reverse.CSZ4 + WI_CS The complete logic – with DEF integrated is: CS = PDist_CS + ( Share_Logic Share_Logic_DEF. DEF_CS) ÷ logic with canal shared CS_DEF = Not Share_Logic_DEF. DEF_CS ÷ logic with canal independent (There is a 10ms delay in drop of on the carried send to avoid a logic race between this signal and the zone pick up.) 2.8.3.2 Inputs Data Type Description CSZ1 Configuration Carrier send for zone 1 CSZ2 Configuration Carrier send for zone 2 CSZ4 Configuration Carrier send for zone 4 (reverse) Not Share_Logic_DEF Configuration DEF channel independent Reverse' Internal Logic Fault detected Reverse Z1' to Z4' Internal Logic Zone 1 to 4 decision (blocked by Pswing or Rguard) WI_CS Internal Logic Winfeed carrier send (Echo) DEF_CS Internal Logic DEF carrier send 2.8.3.3 Outputs Data Type Description CS Internal Logic Main channel Carrier send CS_DEF Internal Logic DEF channel Carrier send Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 39/294 2.8.3.4 Trip logic IEC Standard Carrier Send Trip Logic Application Setting MiCOM 448.15.13 PUR (LFZR) or AUP Z1 Z2.CR.T1 + Z1T1 + Z2.T2 + Z3T3... Z1 = 80% ZL PUP Z2 PUR2 POR2 (LFZR) Z2 Z2.CR.T1 + Z1.T1 + Z2.T2 + Z3T3... Z1 = 80% ZL POP Z2 448.15.14 BOR1 or BOP Z4 Z1. CR .T1.Tp + Z1.T2 + Z2T2 + Z3T3... Z1 > ZL BOP Z1 BOR2 BLOCK2 (LFZR) Z4 Z2. CR .T1.Tp + Z1.T1 + Z2.T2 + Z3.T3... Z1 = 80% ZL BOP Z2 448.15.11 PUP or PUTT Z1 Fwd.CR.T1 + Z1.T1 + Z2.T2 +... Z1 = 80% ZL PUP Fwd 448.15.16 POR1 or POP or POTT Z1 Z1.CR.T1 + Z1.T2 Z2.T2 + Z3.T3... Z1 > ZL POP Z1 2.8.3.5 Tripping modes The tripping mode is settable (Distance scheme\Trip mode): ÷ Force 3P : Trip 3P in all cases ÷ 1PZ1 & CR : Trip 1Pole in T1 for fault in Z1 and also in case of Carrier Received (aided Trip) ÷ 1PZ1, Z2 & CR : Trip 1Pole for T1 & T2 in T1 for fault in Z1 and CR (aided Trip) and also in Z2 with CR Several defined aided trip logic can be selected or an open logic can be designed by user (see also section 4.5 from chapter P44x/EN HW). P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 40/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 P0477ENa PSB PSB: Power swing blocking RVG: Reversal guard LOL: Loss of load + RVG Unblocking Basic + Aided Schemes + Weak-Infeed TOR SOTF Trip Distance Protection LOL FIGURE 7 - MIMIC DIAGRAM The zones unblocking/blocking logic with power swing or reversal guard is managed as explained in the scheme: Figure 3 (section 0) - The unblocking function if enabled, carries out a function similar to Carrier receive logic. (see explanations in section 0) - Weak infeed allows for the case where there may be no zone pick up from local end. - TOR & SOTF applies specific logic in case of manual closing or AR closing logic. - Trip Distance Protection manages the trip order regarding the distance algorithm outputs, the type of trip 1P or 3P, the distance timers, and the logic data such as power swing blocking. - Loss of Load manages a specific logic for tripping 3P in Z2 accelerated without carrier. 2.8.4 The Basic Scheme The Basic distance scheme is suitable for applications where no signalling channel is available. Zones 1, 2 and 3 are set as described in Sections 2.7.3 to 2.7.10. In general zones 1 and 2 provide main protection for the line or cable as shown in Figure 9 below, with zone 3 reaching further to provide back up protection for faults on adjacent circuits. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 41/294 FIGURE 8 - SETTINGS IN MiCOM S1(GROUP1\DISTANCE SCHEME\STANDARD MODE) – 6 DIFFERENTS SETTABLE SCHEMES – ZL Z1A B P3050XXa A Z1B Z2A Z2B FIGURE 9 - MAIN PROTECTION IN THE BASIC SCHEME (NO REQUIREMENT FOR SIGNALLING CHANNEL) Key: A, B = Relay locations; ZL = Impedance of the protected line. P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 42/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 & Protection A Protection B Z1' T1 & Z2' T2 & Z3' T3 & Zp' Tzp Z4' T4 & ≥1 & & & & & Z1' T1 Z2' T2 Z3' T3 Zp' Tzp Z4' T4 ≥1 tZ1 tZ2 tZ3 tZp tZ4 tZ1 tZ2 tZ3 tZp tZ4 Trip Trip P0543ENa FIGURE 10 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE BASIC SCHEME Figure 10 shows the tripping logic for the Basic scheme. Note that for the P441, P442 and P444 relays, zone timers tZ1 to tZ4 are started at the instant of fault detection, which is why they are shown as a parallel process to the distance zones. The use of an apostrophe in the logic (eg. the ‘ in Z1’) indicates that protection zones are stabilised to avoid maloperation for transformer magnetising inrush current. The method used to achieve stability is based on second harmonic current detection. The Basic scheme incorporates the following features : Instantaneous zone 1 tripping. Alternatively, zone 1 can have an optional time delay of 0 to 10s. Time delayed tripping by zones 2, 3, 4, p and q. Each with a time delay set between 0 and 10s. The Basic scheme is suitable for single or double circuit lines fed from one or both ends. The limitation of the Basic scheme is that faults in the end 20% sections of the line will be cleared after the zone 2 time delay. Where no signalling channel is available, then improved fault clearance times can be achieved through the use of a zone 1 extension scheme or by using loss of load logic, as described below. Under certain conditions however, these two schemes will still result in time delayed tripping. Where high speed protection is required over the entire line, then a channel aided scheme will have to be employed. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 43/294 2.8.5 Zone 1 Extension Scheme Auto-reclosure is widely used on radial overhead line circuits to re-establish supply following a transient fault. A Zone 1 extension scheme may therefore be applied to a radial overhead feeder to provide high speed protection for transient faults along the whole of the protected line. Figure 11 shows the alternative reach selections for zone 1: Z1 or the extended reach Z1X. P3052ENa ZL Z1A A B Z1B Z1 Extension (A) Z1 Extension (B) FIGURE 11 - ZONE 1 EXTENSION SCHEME DEFINIED AS DESCRIBED ABOVE: Z1 < Z1X < Z2 or Z1 < Z2 < Z1X (with Z1 < ZL < Z1X) In this scheme, zone 1X is enabled and set to overreach the protected line. A fault on the line, including one in the end 20% not covered by zone 1, will now result in instantaneous tripping followed by autoreclosure. Zone 1X has resistive reaches and residual compensation similar to zone 1. The autorecloser in the relay is used to inhibit tripping from zone 1X such that upon reclosure the relay will operate with Basic scheme logic only, to co- ordinate with downstream protection for permanent faults. Thus, transient faults on the line will be cleared instantaneously, which will reduce the probability of a transient fault becoming permanent. The scheme can, however, operate for some faults on an adjacent line, although this will be followed by autoreclosure with correct protection discrimination. Increased circuit breaker operations would occur, together with transient loss of supply to a substation. The time delays associated with extended zone Z1X are shown in Table 2 below: Scenario Z1X Time Delay First fault trip = tZ1 Fault trip for persistent fault on autoreclose = tZ2 TABLE 2 - TRIP TIME DELAYS ASSOCIATED WITH ZONE 1X The Zone 1 Extension scheme is selected by setting the Z1X Enable bit in the Zone Status function links to 1. P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 44/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 FIGURE 12 – SETTINGS IN MiCOM S1 (GROUP1\DISTANCE SCHEME\ZONE STATUS) Remark: To enable the Z1X logic, the DDB "Z1X extension" cell must be linked in the PSL (opto/reclaim time…) FIGURE 13 - DISTANCE SCHEME WITHOUT CARRIER & Z1 EXTENDED P0478ENa & PDist_Trip & T2 Z2' & Z3' T3 & Zp' Tzp Z4' T4 & ≥1 Z1' T1 >1 Z1x' INP_Z1EXT UNB_Alarm Z1X channel fail & & & None FIGURE 14 – Z1X TRIP LOGIC (Z1X can be used as well as the default scheme logic in case of UNB _Alarm-carrier out of service (See unblocking logic – section 0)) Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 45/294 2.8.5.1 Inputs Data Type Description None Configuration No distance scheme (basic scheme) INP_Z1EXT Digital input Input for Z1 extended Z1x channel fail Configuration Z1X extension enabled on channel fail (UNB-CR. see Mode loss of guard or Loss of carrier) UNB_Alarm Internal logic (See Unblocking logic) Z1x’ Internal logic Z1X Decision (lock out by Power Swing) Z1’ Internal logic Z1 Decision (lock out by Power Swing) Z2’ Internal logic Z2 Decision (lock out by Power Swing) Z3’ Internal logic Z3 Decision (lock out by Power Swing) Zp’ Internal logic Zp Decision (lock out by Power Swing) Z4’ Internal logic Z4 Decision (lock out by Power Swing) T1 Internal logic Elapse of distance timer 1 T2 Internal logic Elapse of distance timer 2 T3 Internal logic Elapse of distance timer 3 Tzp Internal logic Elapse of distance timer p T4 Internal logic Elapse of distance timer 4 2.8.5.2 Outputs Data Type Description PDist_Dec Internal logic Trip order by Distance Protection 2.8.6 Loss of Load Accelerated Tripping (LoL) The loss of load accelerated trip logic is shown in Figure 15. The loss of load logic provides fast fault clearance for faults over the whole of a double end fed protected circuit for all types of fault, except three phase. The scheme has the advantage of not requiring a signalling channel. Alternatively, the logic can be chosen to be enabled when the channel associated with an aided scheme has failed. This failure is detected by permissive scheme unblocking logic, or a Channel Out of Service (COS) opto input. Any fault located within the reach of Zone 1 will result in fast tripping of the local circuit breaker. For an end zone fault with remote infeed, the remote breaker will be tripped in Zone 1 by the remote relay and the local relay can recognise this by detecting the loss of load current in the healthy phases. This, coupled with operation of a Zone 2 comparator causes tripping of the local circuit breaker. Before an accelerated trip can occur, load current must have been detected prior to the fault. The loss of load current opens a window during which time a trip will occur if a Zone 2 comparator operates. A typical setting for this window is 40ms as shown in Figure 15, although this can be altered in the menu LoL: Window cell. The accelerated trip is delayed by 18ms to prevent initiation of a loss of load trip due to circuit breaker pole discrepancy occurring for clearance of an external fault. The local fault clearance time can be deduced as follows : t = Z1d + 2CB + LDr + 18ms P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 46/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Where: Z1d = maximum downstream zone 1 trip time CB = Breaker operating time LDr = Upstream level detector (LoL: I3 element are shown in more detail in Table below. - When a Zone 1 Extension scheme is used along with autoreclosure, it must be ensured that only Zone 1 distance protection can trip instantaneously for TOR. Typically, TOR-SOTF Mode bit 0 only would be set to “1”. Also the I>3 element must be disabled to avoid overreaching trips by level detectors. 2.12.5.1 Inputs Data Type Description Ia, Vc> Internal Logic Live Voltage detected ( V Live Line threshold, fixed at 70% Vn) Valid_stx_PHOC Configuration Threshold I>3 must be activated PHOC_Start_3Ph_I>3 Internal Logic Detection by I>3 overcurrents (not filtered by INRUSH.) Z1, Z2, Z3, all zones Internal Logic Zones Detected 2.12.5.2 Outputs Data Type Description TOC_A Internal Logic Trip phase A by TOR /SOTF TOC_B Internal Logic Trip phase B by TOR /SOTF TOC_C Internal Logic Trip phase C by TOR /SOTF SOTF/TOR trip Internal Logic Trip by SOTF (manual close) or TOR (AR close) logic Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 77/294 2.12.6 Inputs /Outputs in SOTF-TOR DDB Logic See also, DDB description in appendix of the same section. 2.12.6.1 Inputs Man Close CB Digital input (opto) 6 is assigned by default PSL to "Man Close CB" The DDB Man Close CB if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will initiate the internal SOTF logic enable (see Figure 36) without CB control. If CB control is activated SOTF will be enable by internal detection (CB closing order managed by CB control) AR Reclaim The DDB AR Reclaim if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will start the internal logic TOR enable (see Figure 36).- (External AR logic applied). CB aux A CB aux B CB aux C The DDB CB Aux if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will be used for Any pole dead & All pole dead internal detection 2.12.6.2 Outputs SOTF Enable The DDB SOTF Enable if assigned in PSL, indicates that SOTF logic is enabled in the relay – see logic description in Figure 38 TOR Enable The DDB TOR Enable if assigned in PSL, indicates that TOR logic is activated in the relay - see logic description in Figure 38 TOC Start A The DDB TOC Start A if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase A issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 38 TOC Start B The DDB TOC Start B if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase B issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 38 TOC Start C The DDB TOC Start C if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase C issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 38 Any Pole Dead The DDB Any Pole Dead if assigned in PSL, indicates that at least one pole is opened All Pole Dead The DDB All Pole Dead if assigned in PSL, indicates all pole are dead (All 3 poles are opened) P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 78/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 SOTF/TOR Trip The DDB SOTF/TOR Trip if assigned in PSL, indicates a 3poles trip by TOR or SOTF logic - see Figure 38 2.13 Power swing blocking (PSB) (“Power swing” menu) 2.13.1 Description Power swings are oscillations in power flow which can follow a power system disturbance. They can be caused by sudden removal of faults, loss of synchronism across a power system or changes in direction of power flow as a result of switching. Such disturbances can cause generators on the system to accelerate or decelerate to adapt to new power flow conditions, which in turn leads to power swinging. A power swing may cause the impedance presented to a distance relay to move away from the normal load area and into one or more of its tripping characteristics. In the case of a stable power swing it is important that the relay should not trip. The relay should also not trip during loss of stability since there may be a utility strategy for controlled system break up during such an event. Since version C2.x, an out of step function has been integrated in the firmware.That logic manage the start of the OOS by the monitoring of the sign of the biphase loops: X lim -R lim R lim -X lim R R X X Z4 Z3 Stable swing Out Of Step +R +R +R -R Zone A Zone C Zone B P0885ENa New settings (Delta I) have been created also in Power swing (stable swing) with Delta I as a criteria for unblocking the Pswing logic in case of 3 phase fault (see 2.13.2 in the AP chapter). Phase selection has been improved with exaggerated Deltas current. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 79/294 ÷ New DDB: Since version C5.X, when power swing blocking is detected, the resistive reaches of every distance zone are no longer R3/R4. Instead they are kept the same as adjusted. Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size Min Max GROUP 1 POWER SWING Delta R 0.5/In O 0 400/In O 0.01/In O Delta X 0.5/In O 0 400/In O 0.01/In O IN > Status Enabled Disabled or Enabled IN > (% Imax) 40% 10% 100% 1% I2 > Status Enabled Disabled or Enabled I2 > (% Imax) 30% 10% 100% 1% Imax line > Status Enabled Disabled or Enabled Imax line > 3 x In 1 x In 20 x In 0.01 x In Delta I Status (1) Enabled Disabled or Enabled Unblocking Time delay 30s 0 30s 0.1s Blocking Zones 00000000 Bit 0: Z1/Z1X Block, Bit 1: Z2 Block, Bit 2: Zp Block, Bit 3: Zq Block, Bit 4: Z3 Block, Z5: Z4 Block Out of Step (1) 1 1 255 1 Stable swing (1) 1 1 255 1 (1) Since version C2.x P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 80/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.13.2 The Power Swing Blocking Element PSB can be disabled on distribution systems, where power swings would not normally be experienced. Operation of the PSB element is menu selectable to block the operation of any or all of the distance zones (including aided trip logic) or to provide indication of the swing only. The Blocked Zones function links are set to 1 to block zone tripping, or set to 0 to allow tripping as normal. Power swing detection uses a AR (resistive) and AX (reactive) impedance band which surrounds the entire phase fault trip characteristic. This band is shown in Figure 39 below: P3068ENa Zone 4 Zone 3 Δ R Δ X Δ X Δ R Power swing bundary FIGURE 39 - POWER SWING DETECTION CHARACTERISTICS FIGURE 40 - POWER SWING SETTINGS (SET HIGHZONE IS LOCKED OUT) Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 81/294 A fault on the system results in the measured impedance rapidly crossing the AR band, en route to a tripping zone. Power swings follow a much slower impedance locus. A power swing is detected where all three phase-phase measured impedances have remained within the AR band for at least 5ms, and have taken longer than 5ms to reach the trip characteristic (the trip characteristic boundary is defined by zones 3 and 4). PSB is indicated on reaching zone 3 or zone 4. Typically, the AR and AX band settings are both set with: 0.032 x Af x Rmin load. NOTE: Af = Power swing frequency 2.13.3 Unblocking of the Relay for Faults During Power Swings The relay can operate normally for any fault occurring during a power swing, as there are three selectable conditions which can unblock the relay: - A biased residual current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for earth faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: Ir> (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the residual current threshold is: IN > 0.1 In + ( (IN> / 100) . (I maximum) ). - A biased negative sequence current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for phase-phase faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: I 2 > (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the negative sequence current threshold is: I 2 > 0.1 In + ( (I 2 > / 100) . (I maximum) ). - A phase current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for three-phase faults occurring during a power swing. The threshold is set as: Imax line> (in A). - A Criteria in Delta Current can be activated in MiCOM S1 since version C1.0: That flat delta criterion (enabled by S1) will improve the detection of a 3 Phase fault during a power swing (in case of faulty current lower than the Imax line threshold settable in S1) – 100ms are required for unblocking the logic. With the exaggerated delta current (activated all the time in the internal logic) the phase selection has been improved in case of unblocking logic applied with a fault detected during a power swing. Regarding the presence of negative current or zero sequence current, the exaggerated delta current detection are calculated on the phase-phase loop or phase- ground loop. P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 82/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Power Swing Detection S Q R S Q R S Q R S Q R S Q R Loop AN detected in PS bundary Loop BN detected in PS bundary Loop CN detected in PS bundary S Q R S Q R PS loop AN & & AnyPoleDead & PS loop BN Inrush AN Inrush CN Inrush BN Fault clear Healthy Network All Pole Dead & /Fuse Failure confirmed Power Swing unblocking P0488ENa S Q R Iphase>(Imax line>) PS disabled S Q R Unblocking Imax disabled IN> threshold S Q R S Q R Δ Tunblk Δ t Tunb Δ t Tunb Δ Δ t Tunb PS loop CN Tunblk Unblocking IN disabled Unblocking I2> disabled I2> threshold ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 ≥2 FIGURE 41 – POWER SWING DETECTION & UNBLOCKING LOGIC Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 83/294 P0489ENa ≥ 1 Power Swing Detection Z1 Unblock Z1 ≥ 1 Z2 ≥ 1 & Z2' Zp ≥ 1 & Zp' & Zp_Fwd Z1x' Z1' & & Z1x Z3 ≥ 1 & Z3' Unblock Z2 Unblock Z3 Unblock Zp Unblocking Power Swing FIGURE 42 - DISTANCE PROTECTION BLOCK/UNBLOCKING LOGIC Data Type Description AR Configuration 0.1/In to 250/In by step 0.01/In AX Configuration 0.1/In to 250/In by step de 0.01/In ATunbk Configuration 0 to 60 s by step de 1 s. Imax> Configuration 1 to 20 In by step de 0.01 IN> Configuration 0.1In + 10 to 100 % of Imax> I2> Configuration 0.1In + 10 to 100 % of Imax> Unblock Z1 Configuration 0 => Z1 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z1 unblocked during PSwing Unblock Z2 Configuration 0 => Z2 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z2 unblocked during PSwing Unblock Z3 Configuration 0 => Z3 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z3 unblocked during PSwing Unblock Zp Configuration 0 => Zp blocked during PSwing 1 => Zp unblocked during PSwing P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 84/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.13.4 Typical Current Settings The three current thresholds must be set above the maximum expected residual current unbalance, the maximum negative sequence unbalance, and the maximum expected power swing current. Generally, the power swing current will not exceed 2.In. Typical setting limits are given in Table 7 and Table 8 below: Parameter Minimum Setting (to avoid maloperation for asymmetry in power swing currents) Maximum Setting (to ensure unblocking for line faults) Typical Setting IN> > 30% < 100% 40% I 2 > > 10% < 50% 30% TABLE 7 - BIAS THRESHOLDS TO UNBLOCK PSB FOR LINE FAULTS Parameter Minimum Setting Maximum Setting Imax line> 1.2 x (maximum power swing current) 0.8 x (minimum phase fault current level) TABLE 8 - PHASE CURRENT THRESHOLD TO UNBLOCK PSB FOR LINE FAULTS 2.13.5 Removal of PSB to Allow Tripping for Prolonged Power Swings It is possible to limit the time for which blocking of any distance protection zones is applied. Thus, certain locations on the power system can be designated as split points, where circuit breakers will trip three pole should a power swing fail to stabilise. Power swing blocking is automatically removed after the Unblocking Delay with typical settings: ÷ 30s if a near permanent block is required; ÷ 2s if unblocking is required to split the system. 2.13.6 Out Of Step (OOS) A new feature has been integrated since C1.0, which can detect the out of step (OOS) conditions. - How MiCOM Detect the out of step ? : When the criteria for power swing detection are met, and when out of step tripping is selected, then the distance protection with all of its stages is blocked – in order to prevent tripping by the distance protection (The relay can operate normally for any fault occurring during a power swing as there are different criteria which can be used by monitoring current & delta current). When the locus of the 3 single phase loops leave the power swing polygon, the sign of R is checked. If the R component still has the same sign as at the point of entry, then the power swing is detected and managed in the internal logic as a stable swing. Otherwise the locus of the 3 single phase loops have passed through the polygon (indicating loss of synchronism) and the sign of R is different from the point of entry ; then an out of step is detected. In the both cases the MiCOM P440 will provide a monitoring of the number of cycles and check if the setting from S1 has been reached. In that case a trip order is performed by the relay. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 85/294 X lim -R lim R lim -X lim R R X X Z4 Z3 Stable swing Out Of Step +R +R +R -R Zone A Zone C Zone B P0885ENa - What are the settings and logic used in MiCOM S1 ? : The settings are located with the Power-Swing function : P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 86/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 And a dedicated PSL must be created by the user if such logic has to be activated in the relay. DDB n°269: Power Swing is detected (3 single phase loop inside the quad & crossing the AR band in less than 5 ms in a 50 Hz network). Power swing is present either with out of step cycle or stable swing cycle. Outputs for Out of Step: DDB #350 Out Of Step DDB #269 Power Swing DDB #352 Out Of Step Conf DDB n°350: The first out of step cycle has been detected (Zlocus in/out with the opposite R sign) & the « Out Of Step start » picks-up DDB n°352: The number of cycles set by S1 has been reached & Out Of Step is now confirmed Outputs for stable swing: DDB #269 Power Swing DDB #351 S. Swing DDB #353 S. Swing Conf DDB n°351: The first stable swing cycle has been detected (Zlocus in/out with the same R sign) & the « Stable Swing start » picks-up DDB n°353: The number of cycles set by S1 has been reached & Stable Swing is now confirmed Remark: Out-of-step tripping systems should be applied at proper network locations to detect Out of step conditions and separate the network at pre-selected locations only in order to create system islands with balanced generation and load demand that will remain in synchronism. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 87/294 2.14 Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection (“Back-up I>” menu) The overcurrent protection included in the P441, P442 and P444 relays provides two stage non-directional / directional three phase overcurrent protection and two non directional stages (I>3 and I>4), with independent time delay characteristics. One or more stages may be enabled, in order to complement the relay distance protection. All overcurrent and directional settings apply to all three phases but are independent for each of the four stages. The first two stages of overcurrent protection, I>1 and I>2 have time delayed characteristics which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), or definite time (DT). The third and fourth overcurrent stages can be set as follows: I>3 - The third element is fixed as non-directional, for instantaneous or definite time delayed tripping. This element can be permanently enabled, or enabled only for Switch on to Fault (SOTF) or Trip on Reclose (TOR). It is also used to detect close-up faults (in SOTF/TOR tripping logic no timer is applied). I>4 - The fourth element is only used for stub bus protection, where it is fixed as non- directional, and only enabled when the opto-input Stub Bus Isolator Open (Stub Bus Enable) is energised. Since version D2.0, if the “stub bus enable” input is equal to 0, the I>4 function is still active, if the “stub bus enable” input is equal to 1, only the I>4 function is active (not I>1, I>2 and I>3). All the stages trip three-phase only. They could be used for back up protection during a VT failure. The following table shows the relay menu for overcurrent protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. NOTE: Since version C5.x, the maximum setting range and the step size for I> TMS for the two first stages of I> changed. Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size GROUP 1 BACK-UP I> I>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse I>1 Direction Directional Fwd Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev I>1 VTS Block Non-Directional Block, Non-Directional 1.5 x In 0.08 x In 4.0 x In 0.01 x In I>1 Current Set Since version C5.X 1.50 x In 0.08 x In 10.00 x In 0.01 x In I>1 Time Delay 1 s 0 s 100 s 0.01 s I>1 Time Delay VTS 0.2 s 0 s 100 s 0.01 s 1 0.025 1.2 0.025 I>1 TMS Since version C5.X 1 0.025 1.2 0.005 I>1 Time Dial 7 0.5 15 0.1 I>1 Reset Char DT DT or Inverse I>1 tRESET 0 0 100 s 0.01 s I>2 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 88/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size I>2 Direction Non Directional Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev I>2 VTS Block Non-Directional Block, Non-Directional 2 x In 0.08 x In 4.0 x In 0.01 x In I>2 Current Set Since version C5.X 2.00 x In 0.08 x In 10.00 x In 0.01 x In I>2 Time Delay 2 s 0 s 100 s 0.01 s I>2 Time Delay VTS 2 s 0 s 100 s 0.01 s 1 0.025 1.2 0.025 I>2 TMS Since version C5.X 1 0.025 1.2 0.00 5 I>2 Time Dial 7 0.5 15 0.1 I>2 Reset Char DT DT or Inverse I>2 tRESET 0 0 s 100 s 0.01 s I>3 Status Enabled Disabled or Enabled I>3 Current Set 3 x In 0.08 x In 32 x In 0.01 x In I>3 Time Delay 3 s 0 s 100 s 0.01 s I>4 Status Disabled Disabled or Enabled I>4 Current Set 4 x In 0.08 x In 32 x In 0.01 x In I>4 Time Delay 4 s 0 s 100 s 0.01 s Since version C5.X, I>4 may be used as a normal overcurrent stage if no stub bus condition is activated through the binary input Stub Bus Enabled. The inverse time delay characteristics listed above, comply with the following formula: t = T × Error! Where: t = operation time K = constant I = measured current Is = current threshold setting o = constant L = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC curves) T = Time multiplier Setting Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 89/294 Curve description Standard K constant o constant L constant Standard Inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0 Very Inverse IEC 13.5 1 0 Extremely Inverse IEC 80 2 0 Long Time Inverse UK 120 1 0 Moderately Inverse IEEE 0.0515 0.02 0.0114 Very Inverse IEEE 19.61 2 0.491 Extremely Inverse IEEE 28.2 2 0.1217 Inverse US 5.95 2 0.18 Short Time Inverse US 0.02394 0.02 0.1694 Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for the IEEE/US curves. Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on the basic characteristics but the scaling of the time dial is 10 times that of the TMS, as shown in the previous menu. The menu is arranged such that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the I> Time Dial cell is not visible and vice versa for the TMS setting. 2.14.1 Application of Timer Hold Facility The first two stages of overcurrent protection in the P441, P442 and P444 relays are provided with a timer hold facility, which may either be set to zero or to a definite time value. (Note that if an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either definite or inverse time in cell I>1 Reset Char; otherwise this setting cell is not visible in the menu). Setting of the timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for that stage will reset instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current setting. Setting of the hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period. This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays. Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay may not trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the timer hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time. Note that the timer hold facility should not be used where high speed autoreclose with short dead times are set. The timer hold facility can be found for the first and second overcurrent stages as settings I>1 tRESET and I>2 tRESET. Note that these cells are not visible if an inverse time reset characteristic has been selected, as the reset time is then determined by the programmed time dial setting. 2.14.2 Directional Overcurrent Protection If fault current can flow in both directions through a relay location, it is necessary to add directional control to the overcurrent relays in order to obtain correct discrimination. Typical systems which require such protection are parallel feeders and ring main systems. Where I>1 or I>2 stages are directionalised, no characteristic angle needs to be set as the relay uses the same directionalising technique as for the distance zones (fixed superimposed power technique). P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 90/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.14.3 Time Delay VTS Should the Voltage Transformer Supervision function detect an ac voltage input failure to the relay, such as due to a VT fuse blow, this will affect operation of voltage dependent protection elements. Distance protection will not be able to make a forward or reverse decision, and so will be blocked. As the I>1 and I>2 overcurrent elements in the relay use the same directionalising technique as for the distance zones, any directional zones would be unable to trip. To maintain protection during periods of VTS detected failure, the relay allows an I> Time Delay VTS to be applied to the I>1 and I>2 elements. On VTS pickup, both elements are forced to have non-directional operation, and are subject to their revised definite time delay. 2.14.4 Setting Guidelines I>1 and I>2 Overcurrent Protection When applying the overcurrent or directional overcurrent protection provided in the P441, P442 and P444 relays, standard principles should be applied in calculating the necessary current and time settings for co-ordination. For more detailed information regarding overcurrent relay co-ordination, reference should be made to ALSTOM Grid’s ‘Protective relay Application Guide’ - Chapter 9. In general, where overcurrent elements are set, these should also be set to time discriminate with downstream and reverse distance protection. The I>1 and I>2 elements are continuously active. However tripping is blocked if the distance protection function starts. An example is shown in Figure 43. Time Z1,tZ1 Z2,tZ2 Zp,tZp Z3,tZ3 Z4, tZ4 I>1 I>2 Reverse Forward P3069ENa FIGURE 43 - TIME GRADING OVERCURRENT PROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION (DT EXAMPLE) I>1 and I>2 Time Delay VTS The I>1 and I>2 overcurrent elements should be set to mimic operation of distance protection during VTS pickup. This requires I>1 and I>2 current settings to be calculated to approximate to distance zone reaches, although operating non-directional. If fast protection is the main priority then a time delay of zero or equal to tZ2 could be used. If parallel current-based main protection is used alongside the relay, and protection discrimination remains the priority, then a DT setting greater than that for the distance zones should be used. An example is shown in Figure 44. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 91/294 I phase P0483ENa t I 1> I 2> tI1> tI2> Trip No trip FIGURE 44 - TRIPPING LOGIC FOR PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION I>3 Highset Overcurrent and Switch on to Fault Protection The I>3 overcurrent element of the P441, P442 and P444 relays can be Enabled as an instantaneous highset just during the TOR/SOTF period. After this period has ended, the element remains in service with a trip time delay setting I>3 Time Delay. This element would trip for close-up high current faults, such as those where maintenance earth clamps are inadvertently left in position on line energisation. The I>3 current setting applied should be above load current, and > 35% of peak magnetising inrush current for any connected transformers as this element has no second harmonic blocking. If a high current setting is chosen, such that the I>3 element will not overreach the protected line, then the I>3 Time Delay can be set to zero. It should also be verified that the remote source is not sufficiently strong to cause element pickup for a close- up reverse fault. If a low current setting is chosen, I>3 will need to discriminate with local and remote distance protection. This principle is shown in Table 9. I>3 Current Setting Instantaneous TOR/SOTF Function Function After TOR/SOTF Period Time Delay Required Above load and inrush current but LOW Yes - sensitive. Time delayed backup protection. Longer than tZ3 to grade with distance protection. HIGH, > 120% of max. fault current for a fault at the remote line terminal and max. reverse fault current Yes - may detect high current close- up faults. Instantaneous highset to detect close-up faults. I>3 Time Delay = 0. (Note #.) TABLE 9 - CURRENT AND TIME DELAY SETTINGS FOR THE I>3 ELEMENT Key: As the instantaneous highset trips three pole it is recommended that the I>3 Time Delay is set > tZ2 in single pole tripping schemes, to allow operation of the correct single pole autoreclose cycle. P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 92/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 I>4 Stub Bus Protection When the protected line is switched from a breaker and a half arrangement it is possible to use the I>4 overcurrent element to provide stub bus protection. When stub bus protection is selected in the relay menu, the element is only enabled when the opto-input Stub Bus Isolator Open (Stub Bus Enable) is energised. Thus, a set of 52b auxiliary contacts (closed when the isolator is open) are required. P0536ENa I>4 Element: Stub Bus Protection Busbar 1 Busbar 2 Open isolator V = 0 I > 0 VT Protection's blocking using VTs Stub Stub Bus Protection : I >4 Bus Protection : I >4 Although this element would not need to discriminate with load current, it is still common practice to apply a high current setting. This avoids maloperation for heavy through fault currents, where mismatched CT saturation could present a spill current to the relay. The I>4 element would normally be set instantaneous, t>4 = 0s. 2.15 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (NPS) (“NEG sequence O/C” menu) When applying traditional phase overcurrent protection, the overcurrent elements must be set higher than maximum load current, thereby limiting the element’s sensitivity. Most protection schemes also use an earth fault element operating from residual current, which improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, certain faults may arise which can remain undetected by such schemes. Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current of some magnitude. Thus, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can operate for both phase-to-phase and phase to earth faults. The following section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to alleviate some less common application difficulties. - Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements give greater sensitivity to resistive phase-to-phase faults, where phase overcurrent elements may not operate. - In certain applications, residual current may not be detected by an earth fault relay due to the system configuration. For example, an earth fault relay applied on the delta side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star side. However, negative sequence current will be present on both sides of the transformer for any fault condition, irrespective of the transformer configuration. Therefore, an negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be employed to provide time- delayed back-up protection for any uncleared asymmetrical faults downstream. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 93/294 - Where rotating machines are protected by fuses, loss of a fuse produces a large amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the machine due to the heating effects of negative phase sequence current and hence an upstream negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be applied to provide back-up protection for dedicated motor protection relays. - It may be required to simply alarm for the presence of negative phase sequence currents on the system. Operators may then investigate the cause of the unbalance. The negative phase sequence overcurrent element has a current pick up setting ‘I2> Current Set’, and is time delayed in operation by the adjustable timer ‘I2> Time Delay’. The user may choose to directionalise operation of the element, for either forward or reverse fault protection for which a suitable relay characteristic angle may be set. Alternatively, the element may be set as non-directional. 2.15.1 Setting Guidelines The relay menu for the negative sequence overcurrent element (up to version C5.X) is shown below: Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size GROUP 1 NEG SEQUENCE O/C I2> Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled I2> Directional Non-Directional Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev I2> VTS Non-Directionel Block, Non-Directional I2> Current Set 0.2 x In 0.08 x In 4 x In 0.01 x In I2> Time Delay 10 s 0 s 100 s 0.01 s I2> Char Angle –45° –95° +95° 1° Since version C5.X, three additional negative sequence overcurrent stages have been implemented. The second stage includes IDMT curves. The third and fourth stages may be set to operate as definite time or instantaneous negative sequence overcurrent elements. The corresponding relay menu for the negative sequence overcurrent element is shown below Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size GROUP 1 NEG SEQUENCE O/C I2>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse I2>1 Directional Non-directional Non-directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV I2>1 VTS Block Block Block, Non-directional I2>1 Current Set 0.20 x In 0.08 x In 4.00 x In 0.01 x In I2>1 Time Delay 10.00 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s I2>1 Time VTS 0.200 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 94/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size I2>1 TMS 1.000 0.025 1.200 0.005 I2>1 Time Dial 1.000 0.01 100.0 0.01 I2>1 Reset Char DT DT, Inverse I2>1 tReset 0 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s I2>2 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse I2>2 Directional Non Directional Non-Directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV I2>2 VTS Block Block Block, Non-directional I2>2 Current Set 0.20 x In 0.08 x In 4.00 x In 0.01 x In I2>2 Time Delay 10.00 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s I2>2 Time VTS 0.200 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s I2>2 TMS 1.000 0.025 1.200 0.005 I2>2 Time Dial 1.000 0.01 100.0 0.01 I2>2 Reset Char DT DT, Inverse I2>2 tReset 0 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s I2>3 Status Disabled Disabled, Enabled I2>3 Directional Non Directional Non-directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV I2>3 VTS Block Block Block, Non-directional I2>3 Current Set 0.20 x In 0.08 x In 4.00 x In 0.01 x In I2>3 Time Delay 10.00 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s I2>3 Time VTS 0.200 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s I2>4 Status Disabled Disabled, Enabled I2>4 Directional Non Directional Non-directional, Directional FWD, Directional REV I2>4 VTS Block Block Block, Non-directional I2>4 Current Set 0.20 x In 0.08 x In 4.00 x In 0.01 x In I2>4 Time Delay 10.00 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s I2>4 Time VTS 0.200 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s I2> Char angle - 45° -95° 95° 1° Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 95/294 2.15.2 Negative phase sequence current threshold, ‘I2> Current Set’ The current pick-up threshold must be set higher than the negative phase sequence current due to the maximum normal load unbalance on the system. This can be set practically at the commissioning stage, making use of the relay measurement function to display the standing negative phase sequence current, and setting at least 20% above this figure. Where the negative phase sequence element is required to operate for specific uncleared asymmetric faults, a precise threshold setting would have to be based upon an individual fault analysis for that particular system due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure operation of the protection, the current pick-up setting must be set approximately 20% below the lowest calculated negative phase sequence fault current contribution to a specific remote fault condition. Note that in practice, if the required fault study information is not available, the setting must adhere to the minimum threshold previously outlined, employing a suitable time delay for co- ordination with downstream devices. This is vital to prevent unnecessary interruption of the supply resulting from inadvertent operation of this element. 2.15.3 Time Delay for the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element, ‘I2> Time Delay’ As stated above, correct setting of the time delay for this function is vital. It should also be noted that this element is applied primarily to provide back-up protection to other protective devices or to provide an alarm. Hence, in practice, it would be associated with a long time delay. It must be ensured that the time delay is set greater than the operating time of any other protective device (at minimum fault level) on the system which may respond to unbalanced faults, such as: - Phase overcurrent elements - Earth fault elements - Broken conductor elements - Negative phase sequence influenced thermal elements 2.15.4 Directionalising the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element Where negative phase sequence current may flow in either direction through a relay location, such as parallel lines or ring main systems, directional control of the element should be employed. Directionality is achieved by comparison of the angle between the negative phase sequence voltage and the negative phase sequence current and the element may be selected to operate in either the forward or reverse direction. A suitable relay characteristic angle setting (I2> Char Angle) is chosen to provide optimum performance. This setting should be set equal to the phase angle of the negative sequence current with respect to the inverted negative sequence voltage (- V 2 ), in order to be at the centre of the directional characteristic. The angle that occurs between V2 and I2 under fault conditions is directly dependent upon the negative sequence source impedance of the system. However, typical settings for the element are as follows: - For a transmission system the RCA should be set equal to -60° - For a distribution system the RCA should be set equal to -45° P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 96/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.16 Broken conductor detection The majority of faults on a power system occur between one phase and ground or two phases and ground. These are known as shunt faults and arise from lightning discharges and other overvoltages which initiate flashovers. Alternatively, they may arise from other causes such as birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage to cables etc. Such faults result in an appreciable increase in current and hence in the majority of applications are easily detectable. Another type of unbalanced fault which can occur on the system is the series or open circuit fault. These can arise from broken conductors, maloperation of single phase switchgear, or the operation of fuses. Series faults will not cause an increase in phase current on the system and hence are not readily detectable by standard overcurrent relays. However, they will produce an unbalance and a resultant level of negative phase sequence current, which can be detected. It is possible to apply a negative phase sequence overcurrent relay to detect the above condition. However, on a lightly loaded line, the negative sequence current resulting from a series fault condition may be very close to, or less than, the full load steady state unbalance arising from CT errors, load unbalance etc. A negative sequence element therefore would not operate at low load levels. The relay incorporates an element which measures the ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current (I 2 /I 1 ). This will be affected to a lesser extent than the measurement of negative sequence current alone, since the ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current. Hence, a more sensitive setting may be achieved. 2.16.1 Setting Guidelines The sequence network connection diagram for an open circuit fault is detailed in Figure 1. From this, it can be seen that when a conductor open circuit occurs, current from the positive sequence network will be series injected into the negative and zero sequence networks across the break. In the case of a single point earthed power system, there will be little zero sequence current flow and the ratio of I2/I1 that flows in the protected circuit will approach 100%. In the case of a multiple earthed power system (assuming equal impedances in each sequence network), the ratio I2/I1 will be 50%. It is possible to calculate the ratio of I2/I1 that will occur for varying system impedances, by referring to the following equations:- I 1F = Error! I 2F = Error! Where: E g = System Voltage Z 0 = Zero sequence impedance Z 1 = Positive sequence impedance Z 2 = Negative sequence impedance Therefore: Error!= Error! Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 97/294 It follows that, for an open circuit in a particular part of the system, I2/I1 can be determined from the ratio of zero sequence to negative sequence impedance. It must be noted however, that this ratio may vary depending upon the fault location. It is desirable therefore to apply as sensitive a setting as possible. In practice, this minimum setting is governed by the levels of standing negative phase sequence current present on the system. This can be determined from a system study, or by making use of the relay measurement facilities at the commissioning stage. If the latter method is adopted, it is important to take the measurements during maximum system load conditions, to ensure that all single phase loads are accounted for. Note that a minimum value of 8% negative phase sequence current is required for successful relay operation. Since sensitive settings have been employed, it can be expected that the element will operate for any unbalance condition occurring on the system (for example, during a single pole autoreclose cycle). Hence, a long time delay is necessary to ensure co-ordination with other protective devices. A 60 second time delay setting may be typical. The following table shows the relay menu for the Broken Conductor protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:- Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR Broken Conductor Enabled Enabled, Disabled I2/I1 0.2 0.2 1 0.01 I2/I1 Time Delay 60 s 0 s 100 s 1 s I2/I1 Trip Disabled* Enabled, Disabled * If disabled, only a Broken Conductor Alarm is possible. 2.16.2 Example Setting The following information was recorded by the relay during commissioning; I full load = 1000A I 2 = 100A therefore the quiescent I2/I1 ratio is given by; I 2 /I 1 = 100/1000 = 0.1 To allow for tolerances and load variations a setting of 200% of this value may be typical: Therefore set I2/I1 = 0.2 Set I2/I1 Time Delay = 60 s to allow adequate time for short circuit fault clearance by time delayed protections. P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 98/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.17 Directional and non-directional earth fault protection (“Earth fault O/C” menu) The following elements of earth fault protection are available, as follows: - IN> element - Channel aided directional earth fault protection; - IN>1 element - Directional or non-directional protection, definite time (DT) or IDMT time-delayed. - IN>2 element - Directional or non-directional, DT and IDMT (since version D2.0) delayed. Since version C2.X, the following elements are available: - IN>3 element - Directional or non-directional, DT delayed. - IN>4 element - Directional or non-directional, DT delayed. The IN> element may only be used as part of a channel-aided scheme, and is fully described in the Aided DEF section of the Application Notes which follow. The IN>1, IN>2, and, since version C2.X, IN>3 and IN>4 backup elements always trip three pole, and have an optional timer hold facility on reset, as per the phase fault elements. (The IN> element can be selected to trip single and/or three pole). All Earth Fault overcurrent elements operate from a residual current quantity which is derived internally from the summation of the three phase currents. These current thresholds are activated as an exclusive choice with Zero sequence Power Protection (since version C2.X): The following table shows the relay menu for the Earth Fault protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Since version C2.x, two new thresholds of IN have been added Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 99/294 New DDB cells: Since version C5.X, The second stage earth fault overcurrent element can be configured as inverse time. The maximum setting range and the step size for IN> TMS for the two first stages of IN> changed. Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT O/C IN>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse IN>1 Directional Directional Fwd Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev IN>1 VTS Block Non directional Block, Non directional 0.2 x In 0.08 x In 4.0 x In 0.01 x In IN>1 Current Set Since version C5.X: 0.2 x In 0.08 x In 10.0 x In 0.01 x In IN>1 Time Delay 1 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s IN>1 Time Delay VTS 0.2 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s 1 0.025 1.2 0.025 IN>1 TMS Since version C5.X: 1 0.025 1.2 0.005 IN>1 Time Dial 7 0.5 15 0.1 IN>1 Reset Char DT DT, Inverse IN>1 tRESET 0 s 0 s 100 s 0.01s IN>2 Status (up to version C5.X) Enabled Disabled, Enabled P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 100/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size IN>1 Function since version C5.X DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse IN>2 Directional Non Directional Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev IN>2 VTS Block Non directional Block, Non directional 0.3 x In 0.08 x In 32 x In 0.01 x In IN>2 Current Set Since version C5.X 1 0.025 1.2 0.005 IN>2 Time Delay 2 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s IN>2 Time Delay VTS 2 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s IN>2TMS since version C5.X 1 0.025 1.2 0.005 IN>3 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled IN>3 Directional Non Directional Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev IN>3 VTS Block Non directional Block, Non directional IN>3 Current Set 0.3 x In 0.08 x In 32 x In 0.01 x In IN>3 Time Delay 2 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s IN>3 Time Delay VTS 0.2 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s IN>4 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled IN>4 Directional Non Directional Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev IN>4 VTS Block Non directional Block, Non directional IN>4 Current Set 0.3 x In 0.08 x In 32 x In 0.01 x In IN>4 Time Delay 2 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s S i n c e v e r s i o n C 2 . X IN>4 Time Delay VTS 0.2 s 0 s 200 s 0.01 s IN> DIRECTIONAL IN> Char Angle –45° –95° 95° 1° Polarisation Zero Sequence Zero Sequence, Negative Sequence Note that the elements are set in terms of residual current, which is three times the magnitude of zero sequence current (Ires = 3I 0 ). The IDMT time delay characteristics available for the IN>1 element, and the grading principles used will be as per the phase fault overcurrent elements. To maintain protection during periods of VTS detected failure, the relay allows an IN> Time Delay VTS to be applied to the IN>1 and IN>2 elements. On VTS pickup, both elements are forced to have non-directional operation, and are subject to their revised definite time delay. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 101/294 P0490ENa Directional Calculation VN V2 I2 IN IN IN> SBEF Fwd SBEF Rev IN> Pick-up IN> Pick-up Any Pole Dead CTS Blocking & IN> Timer Block IN> Trip IDMT/DT IN> Pick-up Any Pole Dead CTS Blocking & IN> Timer Block IN> Trip SBEF Fwd SBEF Rev Directionnal Check MCB/VTS Line & & & IN> TD VTS 0 >1 IDMT/DT Negative sequence Polarisation Residual zero sequence Polarisation FIGURE 45 - SBEF CALCULATION & LOGIC P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 102/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 SBEF Trip SBEF Overcurrent CTS Block SBEF Trip P0484ENa SBEF Timer Block SBEF Start IDMT/DT FIGURE 46 - LOGIC WITHOUT DIRECTIONALITY SBEF Trip SBEF Overcurrent CTS Block P0533ENa SBEF Timer Block SBEF Start Vx > Vs Ix > Is Slow VTS Block IDMT/DT Directional Check FIGURE 47 - LOGIC WITH DIRECTIONALITY 2.17.1 Directional Earth Fault Protection (DEF) The method of directional polarising selected is common to all directional earth fault elements, including the channel-aided element. There are two options available in the relay menu: - Zero sequence polarising - The relay performs a directional decision by comparing the phase angle of the residual current with respect to the inverted residual voltage: (–Vres = –(Va + Vb + Vc)) derived by the relay. - Negative sequence polarising - The relay performs a directional decision by comparing the phase angle of the derived negative sequence current with respect to the derived negative sequence voltage. NOTE: Even though the directional decision is based on the phase relationship of I 2 with respect to V 2 , the operating current quantity for DEF elements remains the derived residual current. 2.17.2 Application of Zero Sequence Polarising This is the conventional option, applied where there is not significant mutual coupling with a parallel line, and where the power system is not solidly earthed close to the relay location. As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions, this quantity is commonly used to polarise DEF elements. The relay internally derives this voltage from the 3 phase voltage input which must be supplied from either a 5-limb or three single phase VT’s. These types of VT design allow the passage of residual flux and consequently permit the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for residual flux and is therefore incompatible with the use of zero sequence polarising. The required characteristic angle (RCA) settings for DEF will differ depending on the application. Typical characteristic angle settings are as follows: - Resistance earthed systems generally use a 0° RCA setting. This means that for a forward earth fault, the residual current is expected to be approximately in phase with the inverted residual voltage (-Vres). Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 103/294 - When protecting solidly-earthed distribution systems or cable feeders, a -45° RCA setting should be set. - When protecting solidly-earthed transmission systems, a -60° RCA setting should be set. 2.17.3 Application of Negative Sequence Polarising In certain applications, the use of residual voltage polarisation of DEF may either be not possible to achieve, or problematic. An example of the former case would be where a suitable type of VT was unavailable, for example if only a three limb VT were fitted. An example of the latter case would be an HV/EHV parallel line application where problems with zero sequence mutual coupling may exist. In either of these situations, the problem may be solved by the use of negative phase sequence (nps) quantities for polarisation. This method determines the fault direction by comparison of nps voltage with nps current. The operate quantity, however, is still residual current. When negative sequence polarising is used, the relay requires that the Characteristic Angle is set. The Application Notes section for the Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection better describes how the angle is calculated - typically set at - 45° (I 2 lags (-V 2 )). 2.18 Aided DEF protection schemes (“Aided D.E.F” menu) The option of using separate channels for DEF aided tripping, and distance protection schemes, is offered in the P441, P442 and P444 relays. Since C1.0 a better sensitivity could be obtained by using a settable threshold for the residual current in case of reverse fault, e.g. for creating quicker blocking scheme logic. The IN Rev factor can be adjusted from 10% to 100% of IN>. As well in case of independent channel logic with a blocking scheme an independent transmission timer Tp has been created with a short step at: 2ms. When a separate channel for DEF is used, the DEF scheme is independently selectable. When a common signalling channel is employed, the distance and DEF must share a common scheme. In this case a permissive overreach or blocking distance scheme must be used. The aided tripping schemes can perform single pole tripping. Since version C2.x, some improvements have been integrated in DEF. New settings are: P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 104/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 The relay has aided scheme settings as shown in the following table: Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size GROUP 1 AIDED D.E.F. Aided DEF Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled Polarisation Zero Sequence Zero Sequence, Negative Sequence V> Voltage Set 1 V 0.5 V 20 V 0.01 V IN Forward 0.1 x In 0.05 x In 4 x In 0.01 x In Time Delay 0 s 0 s 10 s 0.1 s Scheme Logic Shared Shared, Blocking, Permissive Tripping Three Phase Three Phase, Single Phase Since version C2.X: Tp (if blocking scheme not shared) 2 ms 0 ms 1000 ms 2 ms IN Rev Factor 0,6 0 1 0.1 FIGURE 48 - MiCOM S1 SETTINGS DIST. CR DEF. CR Opto label 01 Opto Label 02 DEF CS DIST CS P0534ENa Relay Label 02 Relay Label 01 FIGURE 49 - PSL REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE DEF LOGIC WITH AN INDEPENDANT CHANNEL DIST. CR DEF. CR Opto label 01 DEF CS DIST CS P0544ENa >1 Relay label 01 FIGURE 50 - PSL REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE DEF LOGIC WITH SHARED CHANNEL Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 105/294 Directionnal Calculation Negative Polarisation Residual Polarisation VN V2 I2 IN V2 VN Negative Polarisation Residual Polarisation V> IN IN> INRev = 0.6*INFwd DEF Fwd DEF Rev INRev> P0545ENa INFwd> DEF V> FIGURE 51 - DEF CALCULATION NOTE: The DEF is blocked in case of VTS or CTS 2.18.1 Polarising the Directional Decision The relative advantages of zero sequence and negative sequence polarising are outlined on the previous page. Note how the polarising chosen for aided DEF is independent of that chosen for backup earth fault elements. The relay has a V> threshold which defines the minimum residual voltage required to enable an aided DEF directional decision to be made. A residual voltage measured below this setting would block the directional decision, and hence there would be no tripping from the scheme. The V> threshold is set above the standing residual voltage on the protected system, to avoid operation for typical power system imbalance and voltage transformer errors. In practice, the typical zero sequence voltage on a healthy system can be as high as 1% (ie: 3% residual), and the VT error could be 1% per phase. This could equate to an overall error of up to 5% of phase-neutral voltage, although a setting between 2% and 4% is typical. On high resistance earthed and insulated neutral systems the settings might need to be as high as 10% to 30% of phase-neutral voltage, respectively. When negative sequence polarising is set, the V> threshold becomes a V2> negative sequence voltage detector. The characteristic angle for aided DEF protection is fixed at –14°, suitable for protecting all solidly earthed and resistance earthed systems. P0491ENa X -14˚ FWD FWD REV REV R P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 106/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.18.2 Aided DEF Permissive Overreach Scheme P0546ENa & DEF Fwd DEF Timer Block Reversal Guard Any Pole Dead UNB CR DEF DEF V> & 0 150 ms IN Rev> t_delay DEF CS DEF Trip T 0 IN Fwd> FIGURE 52 - INDEPENDENT CHANNEL – PERMISSIVE SCHEME P0547ENa & DEF Fwd DEF Timer Block Reversal Guard Any Pole Dead Any DIST Start UNB CR DEF DEF V> & 0 150 ms IN Rev> t_delay DEF CS DEF Trip T 0 IN Fwd> >1 FIGURE 53 - SHARED CHANNEL – PERMISSIVE SCHEME This scheme is similar to that used in the ALSTOM Grid LFZP, LFZR, EPAC and PXLN relays. Figure 54 shows the element reaches, and Figure 55 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the forward IN> DEF element of the relay. If the remote relay has also detected a forward fault, then it will operate with no additional delay upon receipt of this signal. Send logic: IN> Forward pickup Permissive trip logic: IN> Forward plus Channel Received. P3070ENa ZL IN> Fwd (B) IN> Fwd (A) A B FIGURE 54 - THE DEF PERMISSIVE SCHEME Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 107/294 Tri p Trip Signal Send IN> forward Signal Send IN> forward IN > IN>1 t 0 IN>2 t 0 t 0 & >1 >1 t 0 IN>1 t 0 IN>2 t 0 & IN> Forward Forward ProtectionA Protection B P3964ENa Tri p Trip Signal Send IN>1 forward Signal Send IN>1 forward IN>1 IN>2 t 0 IN>3 t 0 t 0 & >1 >1 t 0 IN>1 t 0 IN>2 t 0 & IN>1 Forward Forward Protection A Protection B FIGURE 55 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE DEF PERMISSIVE SCHEME The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults. Where “t” is shown in the diagram this signifies the time delay associated with an element, noting that the Time Delay for a permissive scheme aided trip would normally be set to zero. 2.18.3 Aided DEF Blocking Scheme This scheme is similar to that used in the ALSTOM Grid LFZP, LFZR, EPAC and PXLN relays. Figure 58 shows the element reaches, and Figure 59 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the reverse DEF element of the relay. If the remote relay forward IN> element has picked up, then it will operate after the set Time Delay if no block is received. P0548ENa & & DEF Fwd Reversal Guard Any Pole Dead DEF Timer Block DEF V> UNB CR DEF & 0 150 ms IN Rev> t_delay DEF CS DEF Trip T 0 Tp 0 IN Fwd> DEF Rev DEF V> IN Rev> FIGURE 56 - INDEPENDENT CHANNEL – BLOCKING SCHEME P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 108/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 P0549ENa & & DEF Fwd Reversal Guard Any Pole Dead Any DIST Start DEF Timer Block DEF V> UNB CR DEF & 0 150 ms IN Rev> t_delay DEF CS DEF Trip T 0 0 Tp IN Fwd> DEF Rev DEF V> IN Rev> >1 FIGURE 57 - SHARED CHANNEL – BLOCKING SCHEME Send logic: DEF Reverse Trip logic: IN> Forward, plus Channel NOT Received, with small set delay. IN> Fwd (A) P0550ENa ZL A B IN> Fwd (B) IN> Rev (A) IN> Rev (B) FIGURE 58 - THE DEF BLOCKING SCHEME Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 109/294 Tri p Trip Signal Send IN> Reverse Signal Send IN> Reverse IN > IN>1 t 0 IN>2 t 0 t 0 & >1 >1 t 0 IN>1 t 0 IN>2 t 0 & IN> Forward Forward PRotectionA Protection B Tri p Trip Signal Send IN>1 Reverse Signal Send IN>1 Reverse IN>1 IN>2 t 0 IN>3 t 0 t 0 & >1 >1 t 0 IN>1 t 0 IN>2 t 0 & IN>1 Forward Forward P0551ENb PRotection A Protection B FIGURE 59 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE DEF BLOCKING SCHEME The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults. Where “t” is shown in the diagram this signifies the time delay associated with an element. To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive, a short time delay on aided tripping must be used. The recommended Time Delay setting = max. signalling channel operating time + 14ms. 2.19 Thermal overload (“Thermal overload” menu) – Since version C2.x Since version C2.x, a THERMAL OVERLOAD (with 2 time constant) function has been created as in the other transmission protection of the MiCOM Range, which offer alarm & trip (see section 1.2.1) P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 110/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 New DDB cells: Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. The relay incorporates a current based thermal replica, using load current to model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages. The heat generated within an item of plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is the resistive loss (I 2 R x t). Thus, heating is directly proportional to current squared. The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is therefore based on current squared, integrated over time. The relay automatically uses the largest phase current for input to the thermal model. Equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc. Over temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed to flow for a period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during cooling. 2.19.1 Single time constant characteristic This characteristic is the recommended typical setting for line and cable protection. The thermal time characteristic is given by: exp(-t/t) = (I 2 - (k.I FLC ) 2 ) / (I 2 - I P 2 ) Where: t = Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I; t = Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant; I = Largest phase current; I FLC = Full load current rating (relay setting ‘Thermal Trip’); k = 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 I FLC . I P = Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload. The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from «hot» or «cold». 2.19.2 Dual time constant characteristic (Typically not applied for MiCOMho P443) This characteristic is used to protect oil-filled transformers with natural air cooling (e.g. type ONAN). The thermal model is similar to that with the single time constant, except that two time constants must be set. The thermal curve is defined as: 0.4 exp(-t/t1) + 0.6 exp(-t/t2) = (I 2 - (k.I FLC ) 2 ) / (I 2 - I P 2 ) Where: t1 = Heating and cooling time constant of the transformer windings; t2 = Heating and cooling time constant for the insulating oil. For marginal overloading, heat will flow from the windings into the bulk of the insulating oil. Thus, at low current, the replica curve is dominated by the long time constant for the oil. This provides protection against a general rise in oil temperature. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 111/294 For severe overloading, heat accumulates in the transformer windings, with little opportunity for dissipation into the surrounding insulating oil. Thus, at high current, the replica curve is dominated by the short time constant for the windings. This provides protection against hot spots developing within the transformer windings. Overall, the dual time constant characteristic provided within the relay serves to protect the winding insulation from ageing, and to minimise gas production by overheated oil. Note, however, that the thermal model does not compensate for the effects of ambient temperature change. The following table shows the menu settings for the thermal protection element: Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP 1 Thermal Char Single Disabled, Single, Dual Thermal Trip 1In 0.08In 3.2In 0.01In Thermal Alarm 70% 50% 100% 1% Time Constant 1 10 minutes 1 minutes 200 minutes 1 minutes Time Constant 2 5 minutes 1 minutes 200 minutes 1 minutes FIGURE 60- THERMAL PROTECTION MENU SETTINGS The thermal protection also provides an indication of the thermal state in the measurement column of the relay. The thermal state can be reset by either an opto input (if assigned to this function using the programmable scheme logic) or the relay menu, for example to reset after injection testing. The reset function in the menu is found in the measurement column with the thermal state. P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 112/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.19.3 Setting guidelines 2.19.3.1 Single time constant characteristic The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the plant item/CT ratio. Typical time constant values are given in the following table. The relay setting, ‘Time Constant 1’, is in minutes. Time constant t (minutes) Limits Air-core reactors 40 Capacitor banks 10 Overhead lines 10 Cross section > 100 mm 2 Cu or 150mm 2 Al Cables 60 - 90 Typical, at 66kV and above Busbars 60 TYPICAL PROTECTED PLANT THERMAL TIME CONSTANTS An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Trip’ = 70% of thermal capacity. 2.19.3.2 Dual time constant characteristic The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the transformer / CT ratio. Typical time constants: t1 (minutes) t2 (minutes) Limits Oil-filled transformer 5 120 Rating 400 - 1600 kVA An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Alarm’ = 70% of thermal capacity. Note that the thermal time constants given in the above tables are typical only. Reference should always be made to the plant manufacturer for accurate information. 2.20 Residual overvoltage (neutral displacement) protection (“Residual overvoltage” menu) Software version C5.x model 36, hardware J On a healthy three phase power system, the summation of all three phase to earth voltages is normally zero, as it is the vector addition of three balanced vectors at 120° to one another. However, when an earth (ground) fault occurs on the primary system this balance is upset and a ‘residual’ voltage is produced. Note: This condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with respect to earth which is commonly referred to as “neutral voltage displacement” or NVD. The following figures show the residual voltages that are produced during earth fault conditions occurring on a solid and impedance earthed power system respectively. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 113/294 FIGURE 61 - RESIDUAL VOLTAGE, SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEM As can be seen in the previous figure, the residual voltage measured by a relay for an earth fault on a solidly earthed system is solely depending on the ratio of source impedance behind the relay to line impedance in front of the relay, up to the point of fault. For a remote fault, the ZS/ZL ratio will be small, resulting in a correspondingly small residual voltage. As such, depending upon the relay setting, such a relay would only operate for faults up to a certain distance along the system. The value of residual voltage generated for an earth fault condition is given by the general formula shown. P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 114/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 FIGURE 62 - RESIDUAL VOLTAGE, RESISTANCE EARTHED SYSTEM As shown in the figure above, a resistance earthed system will always generate a relatively large degree of residual voltage, as the zero sequence source impedance now includes the earthing impedance. It follows then, that the residual voltage generated by an earth fault on an insulated system will be the highest possible value (3 x phase-neutral voltage), as the zero sequence source impedance is infinite. From the above information it can be seen that the detection of a residual overvoltage condition is an alternative means of earth fault detection, which does not require any measurement of zero sequence current. This may be particularly advantageous at a tee terminal where the infeed is from a delta winding of a transformer (and the delta acts as a zero sequence current trap). It must be noted that where residual overvoltage protection is applied, such a voltage will be generated for a fault occurring anywhere on that section of the system and hence the NVD protection must co-ordinate with other earth/ground fault protection. Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 115/294 2.20.1 Setting guidelines The voltage setting applied to the elements is dependent upon the magnitude of residual voltage that is expected to occur during the earth fault condition. This in turn is dependent upon the method of system earthing employed and may be calculated by using the formulae’s previously given in the above figures. It must also be ensured that the relay is set above any standing level of residual voltage that is present on the healthy system. Note: IDMT characteristics are selectable on the first stage of NVD and a time delay setting is available on the second stage of NVD in order that elements located at various points on the system may be time graded with one another. Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size RESIDUAL OVER- VOLTAGE GROUP 1 VN>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT VN>1 Voltage Set 5 V 1 V 80 V 1 V VN>1 Time Delay 5.00 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s VN>1 TMS 1.0 0.5 100.0 0.5 VN>1 tReset 0 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.5 s VN>2 Status Disabled Enabled, Disabled VN>2 Voltage Set 10 V 1 V 80 V 1 V VN>2 Time Delay 10.00 s 0 s 100.0 s 0.01 s 2.21 Maximum of Residual Power Protection – Zero Sequence Power Protection (“Zero Seq Power” menu) (since version B1.x) 2.21.1 Function description The aim of this protection is to provide the system with selective and autonomous protection against resistive phase to ground faults. High resistive faults such as vegetation fires cannot be detected by distance protection. When a phase to ground fault occurs, the fault can be considered as a zero-sequence power generator. Zero-sequence voltage is at maximum value at the fault point. Zero-sequence power is, therefore, also at maximum value at the same point. Supposing that zero- sequence current is constant, zero-sequence power will decrease along the lines until null value at the source’s neutral points (see below). Z os1 x . Z ol (1-x).Z ol Z os2 P A P B P3100XXa With: Zos1: Zero-sequence source side 1 impedance Zol: Zero-sequence line impedance Zos2: Zero-sequence source side2 impedance x: Distance to the fault from PA P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 116/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 P o V o 1 0,5 0 1 0,5 0 P A P B Fault P3101ENa Selective fault clearance of the protection for forward faults is provided by the power measurement combined with a time-delay inversely proportional to the measured power. This protection function does not issue any trip command for reverse faults. In compliance with sign conventions (the zero-sequence power flows from the fault towards the sources) and with a mean characteristic angle of the zero-sequence source impedances of the equal to 75°, the measured power is determined by the following formula: Sr = Vr r.m.s x Ir r.m.s x cos(¢ - ¢ 0 ) With: ¢: Phaseshift between Vr and Ir ¢ 0 : 255° or – 75° Vr r.m.s , Ir r.m.s : R.M.S values of the residual voltage and current The Vr and Ir values are filtered in order to eliminate the effect of the 3 rd and 5 th harmonics. Ir(t) > Ir Sr(t) = Vr(t)*Ir(t)*cos(phi-phi0) Sr(t) > Sr Tb & Zsp Start Zsp Trip Ir(t) Vr(t) Déclenchement Triphasé Zsp Timer Block Ta 1 3-pole trip is sent out when the residual power threshold “Residual Power" is overshot, after a time-delay "Basis Time Delay" and a IDMT time-delay adjusted by the “K” time delay factor. The basis time-delay is set at a value greater than the 2nd stage time of the distance protection of the concerned feeder if the 3-pole trip is active, or at a value greater than the single-phase cycle time if single-pole autorecloser shots are active. The IDMT time-delay is determined by the following formula: T(s) = K x (S ref /S r ) Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 117/294 With: K: Adjustable time constant from 0 to 2sec (Time delay factor) S ref : Reference residual power at: 10 VA for In = 1A 50 VA for In = 5A S r : Residual power generated by the fault The following chart shows the adjustment menu for the zero-sequence residual overcurrent protection, the adjustment ranges and the default in-factory adjustments. Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size Group1 ZERO-SEQ. POWER Zero Seq. Power Status Activated Activated / Disabled N/A K Time Delay Factor 0 0 2 0.2 Basis Time Delay 1s 0 s 10 s 0.01s Residual Current 0.1 x In 0.05 x In 1 x In 0.01 x In PO threshold 510 mVA 300 mVA 6.0 VA 30.0 mVA P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 118/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.21.2 Settings & DDB cells assigned to zero sequence power (ZSP) function DDB cell INPUT associated: The ZSP TIMER BLOCK cell if assigned to an opto input in a dedicated PSL , Zero Sequence Power function will start, but will not perform a trip command - the associated timer will be blocked DDB cell OUTPUT associated: The ZSP START cell at 1 indicates that the Zero Sequence Power function has started - in the same time, it indicates that the timers associated have started and are running (fixed one first and then IDMT timer) Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 119/294 The ZSP TRIP cell at 1 indicates that the Zero Sequence Power function has performed a trip command (after the start and when associated timers are issued) 2.22 s. 2.22.1 tion n included within the P441, P442 and P444 relays consists of two he corresponding submenus are visible when Status is activated. Undercurrent protection (“I< protection” menu) Since Version D3.0 This menu contains undercurrent protection function Undercurrent protec The undercurrent protectio independent stages. Stage 1 may be selected or disabled within the I2 Status” is enabled 90V 60V 185V 1V V>2 Time Delay when “V>2 Status” is enabled 0.5s 0s 100s 0.01s V>3 Status (since D3.0) Enabled Disabled, Enabled V>3 Voltage Set when “V>3 Status” is enabled 100V 60V 185V 1V V>3 Time Delay when “V>3 Status” is enabled 1s 0s 100s 0.01s V>4 Status (since D3.0) Enabled Disabled, Enabled Application Notes P44x/EN AP/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 123/294 Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size V>4 Voltage Set when “V>4 Status” is enabled 105V 60V 185V 1V V>4 Time Delay when “V>4 Status” is enabled 1s 0s 100s 0.01s As can be seen, the setting cells for the overvoltage protection are identical to those previously described for the undervoltage protection. The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula: t = K / (M - 1) Where: K = Time Multiplier Setting T = Operating Time in Seconds M = Measured Voltage / relay Setting Voltage (V>) 2.23.2.1 Setting Guidelines The inclusion of the two stages and their respective operating characteristics allows for a number of possible applications; - Use of the IDMT characteristic gives the option of a longer time delay if the overvoltage condition is only slight but results in a fast trip for a severe overvoltage. As the voltage settings for both of the stages are independent, the second stage could then be set lower than the first to provide a time delayed alarm stage if required. - Alternatively, if preferred, both stages could be set to definite time and configured to provide the required alarm and trip stages. - If only one stage of overvoltage protection is required, or if the element is required to provide an alarm only, the remaining stage may be disabled within the relay menu. This type of protection must be co-ordinated with any other overvoltage relays at other locations on the system. This should be carried out in a similar manner to that used for grading current operated devices. 2.24 Frequency protection (“Freq protection” menu) Since Version D3.0 The frequency protection menu contains underfrequency and overfrequency protections, individually activated when the corresponding status is activated. 2.24.1 Underfrequency protection Frequency variations on a power system are an indication that the power balance between generation and load has been lost. In particular, underfrequency implies that the net load is in excess of the available generation. Such a condition can arise, when an interconnected system splits, and the load left connected to one of the subsystems is in excess of the capacity of the generators in that particular subsystem. Industrial plants that are dependent on utilities to supply part of their loads will experience underfrequency conditions when the incoming lines are lost. An underfrequency condition at nominal voltage can result in over-fluxing of generators and transformers and many types of industrial loads have limited tolerances on the operating frequency and running speeds e.g. synchronous motors. Sustained underfrequency has implications on the stability of the system, whereby any subsequent disturbance may lead to damage to frequency sensitive equipment and even blackouts, if the underfrequency condition is not corrected sufficiently fast. P44x/EN AP/H75 Application Notes Page 124/294 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.24.1.1 Setting guidelines In order to minimize the effects of underfrequency on a system, a multi stage load shedding scheme may be used with the plant loads prioritized and grouped. During an underfrequency condition, the load groups are disconnected sequentially depending on the level of underfrequency, with the highest priority group being the last one to be disconnected. The effectiveness of each stage of load shedding depends on what proportion of the power deficiency it represents. If the load shedding stage is too small compared to the prevailing generation deficiency, then the improvement in frequency may be non-existent. This aspect should be taken into account when forming the load groups. Time delays should be sufficient to override any transient dips in frequency, as well as to provide time for the frequency controls in the system to respond. This should be balanced against the system survival requirement since excessive time delays may jeopardize system stability. Setting range Menu text Default setting Min Max Step size Group 1 Freq protection UNDERFREQUENCY F1 Direction]) Directional /Non-directional* Applied voltage _________V/na* Applied current _________A Expected operating time _________s Measured operating time _________s 1.2.5 Trip and Auto-Reclose Cycle Checked Yes/No/na* 1.3 On-load Checks Test wiring removed? Yes/No/na* Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? Yes/No/na* On-load test performed? Yes/No* 1.3.1 VT wiring checked? Yes/No/na* Phase rotation correct? Yes/No* Displayed Voltage Primary/Secondary* Main VT Ratio         y] Sec' VT [Main Primary] VT [Main _______V/na* C/S VT Ratio         Secondary] VT [C/S Primary] VT [C/S _______V/na* Voltages Applied value Displayed value Va _______V _______V Vb _______V _______V Vc _______V _______V C/S Voltage _______V/na* _______V Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P44x/EN RS/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 11/12 1.3.2 CT wiring checked ? Yes/No/na* CT polarities correct ? Yes/No* Displayed Current Primary/Secondary* Phase CT Ratio         y] Sec' CT [Phase Primary] CT [Phase _______A/na* Mutual CT Ratio         y] Sec' CT [Mutual Primary] CT [Mutual _______A/na* Currents Applied value Displayed value IA _______A _______A IB _______A _______A IC _______A _______A IM _______A _______A 1.4 Final Checks Test wiring removed ? Yes/No/na* Disturbed customer wiring re-checked ? Yes/No/na* Circuit breaker operations counter reset ? Yes/No/na* Current counters reset ? Yes/No/na* Event records reset ? Yes/No* Fault records reset ? Yes/No* Disturbance records reset ? Yes/No* Alarms reset ? Yes/No* LEDs reset ? Yes/No* P44x/EN RS/H75 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets Page 12/12 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Comments Commissioning Engineer Customer Witness Date Date Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS P44x/EN CO/H75 Connection Diagrams ) MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 1/14 CONTENT 1. MiCOM P441 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 3 2. MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2) 4 3. MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2) 5 4. MiCOM P442 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 6 5. MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/3) 7 6. MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/3) 8 7. MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (3/3) 9 8. MiCOM P444 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 10 9. MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/3) 11 10. MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/3) 12 11. MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (3/3) 13 NOTE: NCIT connection diagrams are not presented in this chapter. P44x/EN CO/H75 Connection Diagrams Page 2/14 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 3/14 1. MiCOM P441 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION T E R M I N A L B L O C K S - S E E D E T A I L 2 0 0 . 0 2 4 0 . 0 I N C L . W I R I N G 3 0 . 0 1 5 7 . 5 M A X . S E C O N D A R Y C O V E R ( W H E N F I T T E D ) 8 O F F H O L E S 3 . 4 Æ 1 0 . 3 5 1 8 1 . 3 2 3 . 3 1 5 5 . 4 1 5 9 . 0 1 6 8 . 0 2 0 2 . 0 1 7 7 . 0 2 0 6 . 0 M iC O M 4 . 5 E A C H T E R M I N A T I O N A C C E P T S : - 2 x M 4 R I N G T E R M I N A L S H E A V Y D U T Y F L U S H M O U N T I N G P A N E L C U T - O U T D E T A I L T E R M I N A L B L O C K D E T A I L 1 1 8 R E A R V I E W S H O W N A R E T Y P I C A L O N L Y T H E T E R M I N A T I O N P O S I T I O N S 2 1 7 1 6 1 1 9 3 2 4 1 8 S I D E V I E W M O U N T I N G S C R E W S : M 4 x 1 2 S E M U N I T S T E E L T H R E A D F O R M I N G S C R E W . T E R M I N A L S C R E W S : M 4 x 6 S T E E L C O M B I N A T I O N P A N H E A D M A C H I N E S C R E W . F R O N T V I E W T X R X IR IG -B A B C D E F M E D I U M D U T Y = ENTER H EALTH Y O U T O F SERVIC E ALARM TRIP = = CLEAR READ T Y P E O F F I B R E O P T I C C O N N E C T O R : S T 4 P44x/EN CO/H75 Connection Diagrams Page 4/14 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2. MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2) B 1 6 B 1 8 B 1 7 B 1 5 B 1 4 B 1 2 B 1 3 B 1 1 R E L A Y 1 4 R E L A Y 1 3 R E L A Y 1 2 R E L A Y 3 R E L A Y 7 E 1 7 B 9 B 1 0 B 8 B 6 B 7 B 5 B 3 B 4 B 2 B 1 E 1 8 R E L A Y 1 1 R E L A Y 1 0 R E L A Y 8 R E L A Y 9 E 1 6 E 1 5 E 1 3 E 1 4 E 1 2 E 1 0 E 1 1 E 9 E 7 E 8 E 6 R E L A Y 5 R E L A Y 6 R E L A Y 4 F 1 4 E 3 E 4 E 5 E 2 E 1 F 1 1 F 1 3 F 1 2 R E L A Y 2 C O N T A C T R E L A Y 1 W A T C H D O G C O N T A C T W A T C H D O G 3 . V B U S B A R O N L Y R E Q U I R E D I F C H E C K S Y N C H R O N I S M F U N C T I O N E N A B L E D . 2 . I N P U T I S F O R O P T I O N A L M U T U A L C O M P E N S A T I O N O F F A U L T L O C A T O R . P R O T E C T I O N P A R A L L E L L I N E ( b ) P I N T E R M I N A L ( P . C . B . T Y P E ) N O T E S 1 . ( a ) C . T . S H O R T I N G L I N K S B V V B U S B A R ( S E E N O T E 3 . ) C 2 3 C 2 4 C 2 2 C 2 1 C V C 2 0 A V C 1 9 D I R E C T I O N O F F O R W A R D C U R R E N T F L O W D I R E C T I O N O F F O R W A R D C U R R E N T F L O W A B C S 2 P 2 a b c n N P 2 A B C B A C C 4 C 1 1 P H A S E R O T A T I O N S 1 P 1 C A S E E N O T E 2 . B C 1 2 M I I C C 1 0 C 9 C 8 C 7 C 6 B I C 5 D 1 2 D 1 8 D 1 7 D 1 6 D 1 5 D 1 4 D 1 3 D 1 0 D 1 1 D 9 D 8 D 7 D 6 D 5 D 4 P 1 P H A S E R O T A T I O N A C B S 1 S 2 C 3 C 2 A I C 1 D 1 D 2 D 3 + C O M M O N C O N N E C T I O N O P T O 7 O P T O 8 + - - + O P T O 4 O P T O 6 O P T O 5 - + - + O P T O 3 O P T O 2 + - - + - O P T O 1 + - 1 A 5 A N O T E 4 . 4 . C . T . C O N N E C T I O N S A R E S H O W N 1 A C O N N E C T E D A N D A R E T Y P I C A L O N L Y . 5 A 1 A 5 A 1 A 5 A 1 A M i C O M P 4 4 1 ( P A R T ) M i C O M P 4 4 1 ( P A R T ) P O W E R S U P P L Y V E R S I O N 2 4 - 4 8 V ( N O M I N A L ) D . C . O N L Y * M I N O T E 5 N V 5 . O P T O I N P U T S 1 & 2 M U S T B E U S E D F O R S E T T I N G G R O U P C H A N G E S I F T H I S O P T I O N I S S E L E C T E D I N T H E R E L A Y M E N U . F 1 7 - + K B U S E I A 4 8 5 / P O R T F 1 6 S C N F 1 8 N O T E 6 . C O M M S V C A S E E A R T H 4 8 V D C F I E L D V O L T A G E O U T A U X S U P P L Y A C O R D C x - + - + + - F 1 0 F 8 F 9 F 7 F 2 F 1 * S E E D R A W I N G 1 0 P x 4 0 0 1 . 6 . F O R C O M M S O P T I O N S S E E D R A W I N G 1 0 P x 4 0 0 1 . P3942ENb Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 5/14 3. MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2) D 3 S T A N D A R D I N P U T M O D U L E G N 0 0 1 0 0 1 3 ( 1 1 0 V ) 6 4 - W A Y R I B B O N C A B L E B O A R D C O N T A I N S S A F E T Y C R I T I C A L C O M P O N E N T S . U S E R I N T E R F A C E P C B C I R C U I T D I A G . 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 6 0 1 M A I N P R O C E S S O R & B A T T E R Y S E R I A L S K 2 * P L 1 T E S T / D O W N L O A D S K 1 1 6 1 4 1 0 8 6 4 2 1 2 C I R C U I T D I A G . P O W E R S U P P L Y P C B 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 1 0 1 * P L 1 F F 1 F F 3 F F 5 F 7 F F F 9 F 1 1 F 1 3 F 1 5 F F 2 1 8 1 6 1 2 8 1 0 1 4 6 4 2 1 8 R E L A Y P C B C I R C U I T D I A G . 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 2 0 1 S K 1 * S K 1 P L 1 P L 3 * E 3 1 7 F F F E 1 E E 5 E E 7 E E 9 E E 1 1 E E 1 3 E E 1 5 E E 1 7 E E D 1 D P L 1 C I R C U I T D I A G . 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 3 0 3 C O - P R O C E S S O R 7 5 3 1 4 B 2 B 6 B B B B B 1 5 1 3 1 1 9 1 2 1 0 8 B B B 1 4 B B B P L 3 B B C I R C U I T D I A G . 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 2 0 1 R E L A Y P C B P L 1 1 7 1 6 B 1 8 B B G N 0 0 1 4 0 1 3 T R A N S F O R M E R A S S Y 1 2 1 0 8 6 2 4 1 8 1 6 1 4 1 2 1 0 8 6 4 I N P U T P C B C I R C U I T D I A G . A N A L O G U E & O P T O 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 5 0 1 P L 1 P L 2 S K 1 * S K 1 P L 1 1 1 D 7 D 5 D D D 9 D D 1 5 1 3 D D D D D D 1 7 D D C 1 C C 3 C 5 C 7 C C 9 C C 1 1 C C C 2 3 1 9 2 1 2 4 C 2 0 C 2 2 C C C C P44x/EN CO/H75 Connection Diagrams Page 6/14 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4. MiCOM P442 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION T E R M I N A L S C R E W S : M 4 x 6 S T E E L C O M B I N A T I O N P A N H E A D M O U N T I N G S C R E W S : M 4 x 1 2 S E M U N I T S T E E L T H R E A D F O R M I N G S C R E W . T E R M I N A L B L O C K D E T A I L H E A V Y D U T Y E A C H T E R M I N A T I O N A C C E P T S : - 1 2 2 x M 4 R I N G T E R M I N A L S 1 7 1 8 S I D E V I E W M A C H I N E S C R E W . R E A R V I E W S H O W N A R E T Y P I C A L O N L Y T H E T E R M I N A T I O N P O S I T I O N S F L U S H M O U N T I N G P A N E L C U T - O U T D E T A I L F R O N T V I E W 1 1 6 3 1 9 2 4 1 8 R X T X IR IG -B M E D I U M D U T Y S E C O N D A R Y C O V E R ( W H E N F I T T E D ) 2 4 0 . 0 I N C L . W I R I N G 3 0 . 0 1 5 7 . 5 M A X . T E R M I N A L B L O C K S - S E E D E T A I L 1 2 O F F H O L E S Æ 3 . 4 1 5 9 . 0 1 6 8 . 0 1 0 . 3 1 5 5 . 4 1 2 9 . 5 3 0 5 . 5 1 1 6 . 5 5 2 3 . 2 5 1 4 2 . 4 5 3 0 3 . 5 1 7 7 . 0 3 0 9 . 6 G A B C D E F H J M iC O M 4 . 5 4 T Y P E O F F I B R E O P T I C C O N N E C T O R : S T = ENTER HEALTHY O UT O F SERVICE ALARM TRIP = = CLEAR READ Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 7/14 5. MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/3) O P T O 1 6 C O M M O N C O N N E C T I O N O P T O 1 3 O P T O 1 4 O P T O 1 5 O P T O 1 2 O P T O 1 1 O P T O 1 0 C O N N E C T I O N O P T O 5 C O M M O N O P T O 8 O P T O 7 O P T O 6 O P T O 4 O P T O 9 E 4 E 1 3 E 1 8 E 1 7 E 1 6 E 1 4 E 1 5 + - + - + E 1 2 E 1 1 E 1 0 E 9 + - + - E 8 E 7 E 5 E 6 - + - + D 1 3 E 3 E 2 E 1 D 1 8 - + - D 1 5 D 1 7 D 1 6 D 1 4 + - + - + D 1 2 D 1 1 D 1 0 D 9 + - + - D 8 D 7 - R E L A Y 1 3 R E L A Y 1 2 R E L A Y 1 4 G 1 6 G 1 8 G 1 7 G 1 4 G 1 5 G 1 2 G 1 3 G 1 1 R E L A Y 8 R E L A Y 9 R E L A Y 1 1 R E L A Y 1 0 G 5 G 7 G 6 G 8 G 9 G 1 0 G 1 G 2 G 4 G 3 D 6 + D 4 D 5 - + D 3 D 2 - + D 1 - O P T O 2 O P T O 3 O P T O 1 4 . C . T . C O N N E C T I O N S A R E S H O W N 1 A C O N N E C T E D A N D A R E T Y P I C A L O N L Y . P H A S E R O T A T I O N A C B C 1 0 C 1 2 C 1 9 C 2 0 C 2 1 C 2 2 C 2 4 C 2 3 3 . V B U S B A R O N L Y R E Q U I R E D I F C H E C K S Y N C H R O N I S M F U N C T I O N E N A B L E D . P I N T E R M I N A L ( P . C . B . T Y P E ) ( b ) C . T . S H O R T I N G L I N K S N O T E S 1 . ( a ) B V ( S E E N O T E 3 . ) V B U S B A R C V V A N a C 1 1 S E E N O T E 2 . S 1 D I R E C T I O N O F F O R W A R D C U R R E N T F L O W B P A R A L L E L L I N E P R O T E C T I O N C S 2 A P 2 P H A S E R O T A T I O N C B P 1 A c b n C I M C 9 C 8 C 7 I C 6 C 5 I B A A C B C B S 2 N O T E 4 . C 2 C 3 C 4 I A C 1 S 1 D I R E C T I O N O F F O R W A R D C U R R E N T F L O W P 2 P 1 1 A 5 A 1 A 1 A 5 A 5 A 1 A 5 A M i C O M P 4 4 2 P A R T ) M i C O M P 4 4 2 P A R T ) 2 . I N P U T I S F O R O P T I O N A L M U T U A L C O M P E N S A T I O N O F F A U L T L O C A T O R . M I N O T E 5 5 . O P T O I N P U T S 1 A N D 2 M U S T B E U S E D F O R S E T T I N G G R O U P C H A N G E S I F T H I S O P T I O N I S S E L E C T E D I N T H E R E L A Y M E N U . N V A U X S U P P L Y V O L T A G E O U T 4 8 V D C F I E L D x - J 1 0 + - + J 9 J 8 + J 7 J 2 A C O R D C S E E D R A W I N G - J 1 E I A 4 8 5 / P O R T K B U S J 1 6 S C N + J 1 8 * 1 0 P x 4 0 0 1 . - J 1 7 C O M M S N O T E 6 . V 6 . F O R C O M M S O P T I O N S S E E D R A W I N G 1 0 P x 4 0 0 1 . C A S E E A R T H H 1 H 1 8 H 1 5 H 1 7 H 1 6 H 1 4 H 1 3 H 1 1 H 1 2 H 1 0 H 8 H 9 H 7 H 4 H 6 H 5 H 3 H 2 J 1 2 J 1 3 J 1 1 J 1 4 R E L A Y 1 R E L A Y 2 R E L A Y 5 R E L A Y 6 R E L A Y 4 R E L A Y 7 R E L A Y 3 W A T C H D O G C O N T A C T F 7 R E L A Y 2 0 R E L A Y 2 1 R E L A Y 1 8 R E L A Y 1 9 F 1 7 F 1 8 F 1 6 F 1 4 F 1 5 F 1 3 F 1 0 F 1 2 F 1 1 F 9 F 8 R E L A Y 1 5 R E L A Y 1 7 R E L A Y 1 6 F 4 F 6 F 5 F 3 F 2 F 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * P O W E R S U P P L Y V E R S I O N 2 4 - 4 8 V ( N O M I N A L ) D . C . O N L Y * F A S T T R I P R E L A Y ( O P T I O N A L ) * * C O N T A C T W A T C H D O G P3909ENb P44x/EN CO/H75 Connection Diagrams Page 8/14 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6. MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/3) 6 . F O R C O M M S O P T I O N S S E E D R A W I N G 1 0 P x 4 0 0 1 . I F T H I S O P T I O N I S S E L E C T E D I N T H E R E L A Y M E N U . 5 . O P T O I N P U T S 1 A N D 2 M U S T B E U S E D F O R S E T T I N G G R O U P C H A N G E S 4 . C . T . C O N N E C T I O N S A R E S H O W N 1 A C O N N E C T E D A N D A R E T Y P I C A L O N L Y . 3 . V B U S B A R O N L Y R E Q U I R E D I F C H E C K S Y N C H R O N I S M F U N C T I O N E N A B L E D . ( b ) P I N T E R M I N A L ( P . C . B . T Y P E ) ( a ) 1 . C . T . S H O R T I N G L I N K S V B U S B A R N O T E 3 C 2 4 N V C 2 2 C 2 3 V C V B C 2 1 C 2 0 A V C 1 9 P R O T E C T I O N P A R A L L E L L I N E D I R E C T I O N O F F O R W A R D C U R R E N T F L O W N B C P 2 A S 2 b a c n A A C B B C P 2 N O T E 2 C 1 1 A P H A S E R O T A T I O N C S 1 P 1 B C 1 2 C I M C 1 0 C 9 C 8 I I B C 7 C 6 C 5 1 A 5 A 1 A 1 A 5 A P H A S E R O T A T I O N A C B N O T E 4 S 2 S 1 A I C 2 C 3 C 4 C 1 P 1 M i C O M P 4 4 2 P A R T ) 5 A 1 A 5 A E 3 P O W E R S U P P L Y V E R S I O N 2 4 - 4 8 V ( N O M I N A L ) D . C . O N L Y x 4 8 V D C F I E L D V O L T A G E O U T E 1 2 O P T O 1 4 C O N N E C T I O N + E 1 8 E 1 7 C O M M O N + E 1 6 E 1 5 - E 1 3 E 1 4 - + O P T O 1 6 O P T O 1 5 E 1 1 E 1 0 - + E 9 E 8 - + O P T O 1 3 O P T O 1 2 E 7 E 6 + - - E 4 E 5 + - O P T O 1 1 O P T O 1 0 V J 7 J 8 J 9 J 1 0 * - - + + J 1 7 J 1 8 S C N J 1 6 J 1 J 2 A C O R D C A U X S U P P L Y + - K B U S P O R T E I A 4 8 5 / + - * 1 0 P x 4 0 0 1 . S E E D R A W I N G E A R T H C A S E M i C O M P 4 4 2 P A R T ) R E L A Y 1 O P T O 2 D 4 C O N N E C T I O N D 1 7 E 1 E 2 + - D 1 8 O P T O 9 C O M M O N D 1 5 D 1 6 + - D 1 4 D 1 3 + - O P T O 8 O P T O 7 + D 1 2 D 1 1 + - D 1 0 D 9 + - O P T O 6 O P T O 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 - + D 5 - + O P T O 4 O P T O 3 H 1 3 H 1 4 H 1 6 H 1 7 H 1 5 H 1 8 N O T E 6 C O M M S R E L A Y 7 R E L A Y 6 H 2 H 3 H 5 H 6 H 4 H 7 H 9 H 8 H 1 0 H 1 2 H 1 1 R E L A Y 4 R E L A Y 5 R E L A Y 3 R E L A Y 2 N O T E 5 D 3 D 2 - + D 1 - O P T O 1 J 1 4 J 1 1 J 1 3 J 1 2 H 1 W A T C H D O G C O N T A C T C O N T A C T W A T C H D O G G 4 R E L A Y 9 R E L A Y 1 0 R E L A Y 1 1 R E L A Y 1 4 R E L A Y 1 2 R E L A Y 1 3 G 1 7 G 1 8 G 1 6 G 1 0 G 1 1 G 1 3 G 1 2 G 1 5 G 1 4 G 7 G 9 G 8 G 6 G 5 R E L A Y 8 G 3 G 2 G 1 2 . I N P U T I S F O R O P T I O N A L M U T U A L C O M P E N S A T I O N O F F A U L T L O C A T O R . M I + - + - - + + - C O N T A C T S H I G H B R E A K F 1 5 F 1 6 R E L A Y 1 8 F 1 1 F 1 2 F 8 F 7 R E L A Y 1 7 R E L A Y 1 6 N O T E 7 F 4 F 3 R E L A Y 1 5 7 . T O O B T A I N H I G H B R E A K D U T Y , C O N T A C T S M U S T B E C O N N E C T E D W I T H T H E C O R R E C T P O L A R I T Y . D I R E C T I O N O F F O R W A R D C U R R E N T F L O W N O T E S P3943ENa Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 9/14 7. MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (3/3) 1 2 E B O A R D C O N T A I N S S A L E T Y C R I T I C A L C O M P O N E N T S . T E S T / D O W N L O A D S K 2 S E R I A L U S E R I N T E R L A C E P C B C I R C U I T D I A G . 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 6 0 1 B A T T E R Y S K 1 M A I N P R O C E S S O R & * 6 4 - W A Y R I B B O N C A B L E 5 G G G G 2 1 G 4 3 G G G G 1 0 G 6 7 G 8 9 G 1 2 G 1 1 G 1 4 1 3 * E G G 1 7 G 1 6 1 5 G 1 8 E 2 1 E E E E E 5 E 4 3 E 6 7 1 0 E 8 9 E 1 1 * C I R C U I T D I A G . P O W E R S U P P L Y P C B 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 1 0 1 * S K 1 J 1 0 J J J J J 3 J 2 1 J 4 5 J 6 7 J 8 9 J J J J 1 5 1 2 J 1 1 J 1 4 1 3 1 7 J 1 6 J 1 8 R E L A Y P C B Z N 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 o u * S K 1 8 H H H H H 1 H 2 3 H 4 5 H 6 7 H H H H H 1 3 H 1 0 9 H 1 2 1 1 1 5 H 1 4 H 1 6 1 7 * F F F H 1 8 1 F 4 F 2 3 F 6 5 F F F F F 1 1 F 8 7 F 1 0 9 1 3 F 1 2 F 1 4 1 5 C I R C U I T D I A G 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 7 0 1 F I B R E O P T I C T R A N S D U C E R S I R I G - B P C B E E E 1 7 1 4 E 1 3 E 1 6 1 5 E 1 8 B N C T x 1 R x 1 1 0 T R A N S F O R M E R A S S Y G N 0 0 1 4 0 1 3 D 1 2 A N A L O G U E & O P T O Z N 0 0 0 5 0 0 1 o u * I N P U T P C B D F 1 8 F 1 6 1 7 F D 2 1 D D D D D 5 D 4 3 D 6 7 1 0 D 8 9 D 1 1 S K 1 * S K 1 C D D D 1 7 D 1 4 1 3 D 1 6 1 5 D 1 8 C C C C C 2 1 3 C 4 5 C 8 C 6 7 C 9 C 2 2 C C C 1 2 1 1 2 0 C 1 9 C 2 1 C 2 4 C 2 3 Z N 0 0 1 7 0 0 2 ( U I ) Z N 0 0 0 5 0 0 2 o u O P T O P C B C I R C U I T D I A G 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 3 0 3 C O - P R O C E S S O R Z N 0 0 3 1 0 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 o u Z N 0 0 3 1 0 0 1 R E L A Y P C B P L 1 R E L A Y P C B Z N 0 0 3 1 0 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 o u P L 1 P L 1 P L 1 P L 1 P L 1 P L 1 P L 1 Z N 0 0 1 7 0 0 1 * S T A N D A R D I N P U T M O D U L E G N 0 0 1 0 0 1 3 ( 1 1 0 V ) 0 1 Z N 0 0 2 5 0 0 1 8 6 4 2 1 3 5 7 9 1 5 4 2 3 9 7 8 6 B N C R e a r C o m 2 + I R I G B ( o p t i o n a l ) D - t y p e D - t y p e S K 4 S K 5 ( u n u s e d ) ( u n u s e d ) D - t y p e 3 2 1 6 4 5 2 7 8 9 1 D - t y p e 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 R e a r C o m 2 ( o p t i o n a l ) 0 1 Z N 0 0 2 5 0 0 2 S K 4 S K 5 I R I G - B P C B B N C 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 7 0 0 1 F I B R E O P T I C T R A N S D U C E R S P 3 9 1 1 E N a 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 7 0 0 2 R x 1 I R I G - B P C B T x 1 O p t i c a l f i b e r + P 4 4 2 P44x/EN CO/H75 Connection Diagrams Page 10/14 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8. MiCOM P444 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION T E R M I N A L B L O C K D E T A I L H E A V Y D U T Y E A C H T E R M I N A T I O N A C C E P T S : - 1 2 2 x M 4 R I N G T E R M I N A L S 1 7 1 8 1 1 6 3 1 9 2 4 1 8 M E D I U M D U T Y 1 2 O F F H O L E S D i a . 3 . 4 F L U S H M O U N T I N G P A N E L C U T - O U T D E T A I L . 1 4 2 . 4 5 1 1 6 . 5 5 7 4 . 9 1 5 9 . 0 6 2 . 0 1 5 5 . 4 4 0 8 . 9 1 2 9 . 5 4 . 5 1 6 8 . 0 T E R M I N A L S C R E W S : M 4 x 7 B R A S S C H E E S E H E A D S C R E W S W I T H M O U N T I N G S C R E W S : M 4 x 1 2 S E M U N I T S T E E L T H R E A D F O R M I N G S C R E W . 3 0 . 0 L O C K W A S H E R S P R O V I D E D . F R O N T V I E W ENTER READ = = CLEAR OUTOFSERVICE HEALTHY = TRIP ALARM M iC O M 4 0 6 . 9 4 1 3 . 2 1 7 7 . 0 S E C O N D A R Y C O V E R ( W H E N F I T T E D ) 2 4 0 . 0 I N C L . W I R I N G S I D E V I E W 1 5 7 . 5 M A X . R E A R V I E W S H O W N A R E T Y P I C A L O N L Y T H E T E R M I N A T I O N P O S I T I O N S T E R M I N A L B L O C K S - S E E D E T A I L RX 16 TX IRIG -B T Y P E O F F I B R E O P T I C C O N N E C T O R : S T 4 Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 11/14 9. MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/3) O P T O 1 6 C O M M O N C O N N E C T I O N O P T O 1 3 O P T O 1 4 O P T O 1 5 O P T O 1 2 O P T O 1 1 O P T O 1 0 C O N N E C T I O N O P T O 5 C O M M O N O P T O 8 O P T O 7 O P T O 6 O P T O 4 O P T O 9 E 4 E 1 3 E 1 8 E 1 7 E 1 6 E 1 4 E 1 5 + - + - + E 1 2 E 1 1 E 1 0 E 9 + - + - E 8 E 7 E 5 E 6 - + - + D 1 3 E 3 E 2 E 1 D 1 8 - + - D 1 5 D 1 7 D 1 6 D 1 4 + - + - + D 1 2 D 1 1 D 1 0 D 9 + - + - D 8 D 7 - R E L A Y 2 7 R E L A Y 3 2 J 1 7 J 1 8 R E L A Y 3 1 J 1 5 J 1 6 J 1 2 J 1 4 J 1 3 J 6 J 8 J 7 J 9 J 1 0 J 1 1 R E L A Y 2 6 R E L A Y 2 5 N 1 4 J 2 J 1 J 3 J 5 J 4 N 1 1 N 1 3 N 1 2 D 6 + D 4 D 5 - + D 3 D 2 - + D 1 - O P T O 2 O P T O 3 O P T O 1 4 . C .T . C O N N E C T I O N S A R E S H O W N 1 A C O N N E C T E D A N D A R E T Y P I C A L O N L Y . P H A S E R O T A T I O N A C B C 1 0 C 1 2 C 1 9 C 2 0 C 2 1 C 2 2 C 2 4 C 2 3 3 . V B U S B A R O N L Y R E Q U I R E D I F C H E C K S Y N C H R O N I S M F U N C T I O N E N A B L E D . P I N T E R M I N A L ( P . C . B . T Y P E ) ( b ) C . T . S H O R T I N G L I N K S ( a ) B V ( S E E N O T E 3 .) V B U S B A R C V V A N a C 1 1 S E E N O T E 2 . S 1 D I R E C T I O N O F F O R W A R D C U R R E N T F L O W B P A R A L L E L L I N E P R O T E C T I O N C S 2 A P 2 P H A S E R O T A T IO N C B P 1 A c b n C I M C 9 C 8 C 7 I C 6 C 5 I B A A C B C B S 2 N O T E 4 . C 2 C 3 C 4 I A C 1 S 1 D I R E C T I O N O F F O R W A R D C U R R E N T F L O W P 2 P 1 1 A 5 A 1 A 1 A 5 A 5 A 1 A 5 A M i C O M P 4 4 4 ( P A R T ) M i C O M P 4 4 4 ( P A R T ) 2 . I N P U T I S F O R O P T I O N A L M U T U A L C O M P E N S A T I O N O F F A U L T L O C A T O R . M I N O T E 5 N V R E L A Y 2 8 R E L A Y 2 9 R E L A Y 3 0 R E L A Y 8 R E L A Y 7 M 1 8 M 1 7 M 1 6 M 1 5 M 1 4 R E L A Y 2 R E L A Y 1 R E L A Y 6 R E L A Y 5 R E L A Y 4 R E L A Y 3 M 2 M 8 M 1 1 M 1 3 M 1 2 M 1 0 M 9 M 5 M 7 M 6 M 4 M 3 M 1 F 1 8 F 1 7 F 1 4 F 1 5 F 1 6 F 1 3 F 1 2 F 1 1 F 1 0 F 9 F 8 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 4 F 3 F 2 F 1 O P T O 2 2 + C O M M O N C O N N E C T I O N O P T O 2 3 O P T O 2 4 - + - + O P T O 2 0 O P T O 2 1 - + + - - O P T O 1 9 O P T O 1 8 + - + - O P T O 1 7 + - P O W E R S U P P L Y V E R S I O N 2 4 - 4 8 V ( N O M I N A L ) D .C . O N L Y * E A R T H C A S E S E E D R A W I N G E I A 4 8 5 / P O R T K B U S N 1 6 S C N + N 1 8 1 0 P x 4 0 0 1 . - N 1 7 C O M M S N O T E 6 . 6 . F O R C O M M S O P T I O N S S E E D R A W I N G 1 0 P x 4 0 0 1 . I F T H I S O P T I O N I S S E L E C T E D I N T H E R E L A Y M E N U . 5 . O P T O I N P U T S 1 A N D 2 M U S T B E U S E D F O R S E T T I N G G R O U P C H A N G E S L 1 7 L 1 8 L 1 5 L 1 6 L 1 4 L 1 2 L 1 3 L 1 1 L 1 0 L 9 L 8 L 6 L 7 L 5 L 3 L 4 L 2 L 1 R E L A Y 1 6 R E L A Y 1 5 R E L A Y 1 4 R E L A Y 1 2 R E L A Y 1 3 R E L A Y 1 1 R E L A Y 9 R E L A Y 1 0 * - - + + + - N 1 N 2 N 7 N 8 N 9 N 1 0 V O L T A G E O U T A C O R D C 4 8 V D C F I E L D A U X S U P P L Y V x K 1 7 K 1 8 K 1 6 K 1 3 K 1 5 K 1 4 K 1 0 K 1 2 K 1 1 K 8 K 9 K 7 K 5 K 6 K 4 K 2 K 3 K 1 R E L A Y 2 4 R E L A Y 2 1 R E L A Y 2 3 R E L A Y 2 2 R E L A Y 2 0 R E L A Y 1 8 R E L A Y 1 9 R E L A Y 1 7 R E L A Y 3 9 R E L A Y 3 8 R E L A Y 3 7 R E L A Y 3 6 R E L A Y 3 5 R E L A Y 3 4 R E L A Y 3 3 H 9 H 1 3 H 1 6 H 1 8 H 1 7 H 1 5 H 1 4 H 1 2 H 1 0 H 1 1 H 8 H 7 H 5 H 6 H 2 H 4 H 3 H 1 G 8 G 1 4 G 1 7 G 1 8 G 1 6 G 1 5 G 1 1 G 1 3 G 1 2 G 1 0 G 9 G 7 G 6 G 5 G 3 G 4 G 2 G 1 R E L A Y 4 6 R E L A Y 4 5 R E L A Y 4 4 R E L A Y 4 3 R E L A Y 4 0 F A S T T R I P R E L A Y ( O P T I O N A L ) W A T C H D O G C O N T A C T C O N T A C T W A T C H D O G R E L A Y 4 1 R E L A Y 4 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * M O D E L V E R S I O N O P T I O N A L D E P E N D A N T O N P3910ENc P44x/EN CO/H75 Connection Diagrams Page 12/14 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 10. MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/3) 3 . V B U S B A R O N L Y R E Q U I R E D I F C H E C K S Y N C H R O N I S M F U N C T I O N E N A B L E D . 4 . C . T . C O N N E C T I O N S A R E S H O W N 1 A C O N N E C T E D A N D A R E T Y P I C A L O N L Y . 6 . F O R C O M M S O P T I O N S S E E D R A W I N G 1 0 P x 4 0 0 1 . ( b ) P I N T E R M I N A L ( P . C . B . T Y P E ) 1 . ( a ) C . T . S H O R T I N G L I N K S F 1 8 F 1 7 F 1 6 F 1 5 F 1 2 F 1 3 F 1 4 F 1 1 F 1 0 C 2 1 C V V B U S B A R N O T E 3 C 2 4 V N C 2 3 C 2 2 B V C 2 0 V A C 1 9 F 5 F 9 F 8 F 6 F 7 F 3 F 4 F 2 F 1 E 1 4 E 1 6 E 1 8 E 1 7 E 1 5 E 1 3 E 1 2 E 1 1 E 1 0 D I R E C T I O N O F F O R W A R D C U R R E N T F L O W P R O T E C T I O N P A R A L L E L L I N E D I R E C T I O N O F F O R W A R D C U R R E N T F L O W N S 2 C B P 2 A a c b n A A C B B C P 2 C 3 N O T E 4 D 9 M P H A S E R O T A T IO N S 1 C N O T E 2 P 1 A B C 1 2 C 1 1 1 A C 9 I C 1 0 I C C 8 1 A 5 A C 5 C 6 C 7 I B C 4 1 A 5 A 5 A D 1 8 E 5 E 7 E 8 E 9 E 6 E 4 E 3 E 1 E 2 D 1 6 D 1 7 D 1 5 D 1 4 D 1 3 D 1 2 D 1 0 D 1 1 P H A S E R O T A T I O N A C B S 2 S 1 I A C 2 C 1 1 A 5 A P 1 D 7 D 8 D 6 D 5 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 1 M i C O M P 4 4 4 ( P A R T ) - R E L A Y 2 7 P O W E R S U P P L Y V E R S I O N 2 4 - 4 8 V ( N O M I N A L ) D . C . O N L Y O P T O 2 1 - K B U S P O R T E I A 4 8 5 / + O P T O 2 4 C O N N E C T I O N C O M M O N + - O P T O 2 2 O P T O 2 3 - + - + * 1 0 P x 4 0 0 1 . S E E D R A W I N G - N 1 8 S C N N 1 6 + N 1 7 N O T E 6 C O M M S O P T O 1 9 O P T O 2 0 - + + - O P T O 1 7 O P T O 1 8 + - - + O P T O 1 5 C O M M O N O P T O 1 6 C O N N E C T I O N + - + O P T O 1 4 O P T O 1 3 - - + + + A U X S U P P L Y x V N 2 N 1 0 N 9 N 8 N 7 E A R T H C A S E - 4 8 V D C F I E L D V O L T A G E O U T - + + G 1 1 * N 1 G 1 8 G 1 7 G 1 4 G 1 5 G 1 6 G 1 2 G 1 3 R E L A Y 3 4 A C O R D C - R E L A Y 3 2 R E L A Y 3 3 G 5 G 8 G 9 G 1 0 G 6 G 7 G 2 G 4 G 3 G 1 H 1 8 R E L A Y 3 0 R E L A Y 3 1 R E L A Y 2 9 R E L A Y 2 8 M i C O M P 4 4 4 ( P A R T ) R E L A Y 4 M 8 R E L A Y 5 R E L A Y 6 R E L A Y 7 R E L A Y 8 C O N N E C T I O N O P T O 1 1 O P T O 1 2 + - + - O P T O 9 O P T O 1 0 + - + - - O P T O 7 O P T O 8 C O M M O N + - + O P T O 6 O P T O 5 - + + - M 1 4 M 1 5 M 1 6 M 1 7 M 1 8 M 1 0 M 1 2 M 1 3 M 1 1 M 9 W A T C H D O G C O N T A C T C O N T A C T W A T C H D O G R E L A Y 3 R E L A Y 1 R E L A Y 2 + O P T O 3 O P T O 4 + - - + O P T O 1 O P T O 2 - + - N O T E 5 N 1 1 M 2 M 5 M 7 M 6 M 4 M 3 N 1 2 N 1 3 N 1 4 M 1 H 6 R E L A Y 2 3 H 1 2 H 1 6 H 1 7 H 1 5 H 1 3 H 1 4 H 9 H 1 0 H 1 1 H 7 H 8 R E L A Y 2 6 R E L A Y 2 4 R E L A Y 2 5 H 3 H 5 H 4 H 2 H 1 R E L A Y 2 1 R E L A Y 2 2 2 . I N P U T I S F O R O P T I O N A L M U T U A L C O M P E N S A T I O N O F F A U L T L O C A T O R . M I I F T H I S O P T I O N I S S E L E C T E D I N T H E R E L A Y M E N U . 5 . O P T O I N P U T S 1 A N D 2 M U S T B E U S E D F O R S E T T I N G G R O U P C H A N G E S + - + - - + + - + - + - - + + - R E L A Y 9 K 4 R E L A Y 1 6 K 1 6 K 1 5 R E L A Y 1 4 R E L A Y 1 5 K 1 2 K 1 1 K 8 K 7 N O T E 7 C O N T A C T S H I G H B R E A K L 1 2 R E L A Y 1 2 R E L A Y 1 3 K 3 L 1 6 L 1 5 R E L A Y 1 0 R E L A Y 1 1 L 8 L 1 1 L 7 L 4 L 3 + - + - - + + - R E L A Y 1 7 H I G H B R E A K C O N T A C T S J 1 2 J 1 6 J 1 5 R E L A Y 2 0 J 8 J 1 1 J 7 J 4 R E L A Y 1 9 R E L A Y 1 8 N O T E 7 J 3 C O N N E C T E D W I T H T H E C O R R E C T P O L A R I T Y . 7 . T O O B T A I N H I G H B R E A K D U T Y , C O N T A C T S M U S T B E N O T E 7 C O N T A C T S H I G H B R E A K N O T E S P3944ENa Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 13/14 11. MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (3/3) 1 2 E B O A R D C O N T A I N S S A L E T Y C R I T I C A L C O M P O N E N T S . E X A M P L E F O R : P 4 4 4 1 1 4 A 3 A ? ? ? ? A T E S T / D O W N L O A D S K 2 S E R I A L U S E R I N T E R L A C E P C B C I R C U I T D I A G . 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 6 0 1 B A T T E R Y S K 1 M A I N P R O C E S S O R & * 6 4 - W A Y R I B B O N C A B L E 5 J J J J 2 1 J 4 3 J J J J 1 0 J 6 7 J 8 9 J 1 2 J 1 1 J 1 4 1 3 0 1 Z n 0 0 1 9 0 1 C I R C U I T D I A G . * R E L A Y P C B K J J 1 7 J 1 6 1 5 J 1 8 K 2 1 K K K K K 5 K 4 3 K 6 7 1 0 K 8 9 K 1 1 * C I R C U I T D I A G . P O W E R S U P P L Y P C B 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 1 0 1 * S K 1 N 1 0 N N N N N 3 N 2 1 N 4 5 N 6 7 N 8 9 N N N N 1 5 1 2 N 1 1 N 1 4 1 3 1 7 N 1 6 N 1 8 R E L A Y P C B C I R C U I T D I A G . 0 1 Z n 0 0 1 9 0 1 * S K 1 8 M M M M M 1 M 2 3 M 4 5 M 6 7 M M M M M 1 3 M 1 0 9 M 1 2 1 1 1 5 M 1 4 M 1 6 1 7 C I R C U I T D I A G . 0 1 Z n 0 0 1 9 0 1 * R E L A Y P C B L L L M 1 8 1 L 4 L 2 3 L 6 5 L L L L L 1 1 L 8 7 L 1 0 9 1 3 L 1 2 L 1 4 1 5 C I R C U I T D I A G 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 7 0 3 F I B R E O P T I C T R A N S D U C E R S I R I G - B P C B K K K 1 7 1 4 K 1 3 K 1 6 1 5 K 1 8 B N C T x 1 R x 1 1 0 T R A N S F O R M E R A S S Y G N 0 0 1 4 0 1 3 D 1 2 C I R C U I T D I A G . U N I V E R S A L O P T O 0 1 Z n 0 0 1 7 0 1 * I N P U T P C B D L 1 8 L 1 6 1 7 L D 2 1 D D D D D 5 D 4 3 D 6 7 1 0 D 8 9 D 1 1 S K 1 * S K 1 C D D D 1 7 D 1 4 1 3 D 1 6 1 5 D 1 8 C C C C C 2 1 3 C 4 5 C 8 C 6 7 C 9 C 2 2 C C C 1 2 1 1 2 0 C 1 9 C 2 1 C 2 4 C 2 3 1 2 E 5 F F F F 2 1 F 4 3 F F F F 1 0 F 6 7 F 8 9 F 1 2 F 1 1 F 1 4 1 3 * E F F 1 7 F 1 6 1 5 F 1 8 E 2 1 E E E E E 5 E 4 3 E 6 7 1 0 E 8 9 E 1 1 * E E E 1 7 1 4 E 1 3 E 1 6 1 5 E 1 8 C I R C U I T D I A G . U N I V E R S E L O P T O 0 1 Z N 0 0 1 7 0 2 I N P U T P C B C I R C U I T D I A G . U N I V E R S E L O P T O 0 1 Z n 0 0 1 7 0 2 I N P U T P C B 0 1 Z n 0 0 1 9 0 1 C I R C U I T D I A G . R E L A Y P C B C I R C U I T D I A G 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 3 0 3 C O - P R O C E S S O R 0 1 Z N 0 0 2 5 0 0 1 8 6 4 2 1 3 5 7 9 1 5 4 2 3 9 7 8 6 B N C R e a r C o m 2 + I R I G B ( o p t i o n a l ) D - t y p e D - t y p e S K 4 S K 5 ( u n u s e d ) ( u n u s e d ) D - t y p e 3 2 1 6 4 5 2 7 8 9 1 D - t y p e 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 R e a r C o m 2 ( o p t i o n a l ) 0 1 Z N 0 0 2 5 0 0 2 S K 4 S K 5 I R I G - B P C B B N C 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 7 0 0 1 F I B R E O P T I C T R A N S D U C E R S P 3 9 1 2 E N a 0 1 Z N 0 0 0 7 0 0 2 R x 1 I R I G - B P C B T x 1 O p t i c a l f i b e r + P 4 4 4 P44x/EN CO/H75 Connection Diagrams Page 14/14 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 CONFIGURATION / MAPPING P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 1/2 The following configuration / Mapping is specific to the software D2.0. CONFIGURATION / MAPPING This Chapter is split into several sections, these are as follows: Part A: Menu database This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the Courier interface and the front panel user interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Indexed strings for Courier and the user interface are cross referenced to the Menu Datatype Definition section (using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits and default value are also defined within this database. NOTE: The following labels are used within the database Label Description Value V1 Main VT Rating 1 (100/110V) V2 Checksync VT Rating 1 (100/110V) I1 Phase CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A08) I4 Mutual CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E) Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus This table defines the datatypes used for Modbus (the datatypes for the Courier and user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the standard Courier Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting options for all interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross reference to from the Menu Database using a G number. Part C: Internal digital signals (DDB) This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output contacts and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 512 internal signals each reference by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric index is used to select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It is also used to explicitly define protection events produced by the relay. Part D: Menu Database for MODBUS This database defines the structure of the menu for the Modbus interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Part E: IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide This table fully defines the operation of the IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface for the relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the Communications Chapter of this Manual (P44x/EN CT). Part F: DNP3.0 Database This database defines the structure of the menu for the DNP3.0 interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Part G: Maintenance records This section of the Appendix specifies all the maintenance information that can be produced by the relay. P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 2/2 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 DEFAULT PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (PSL) References Chapter IT: Introduction : User Interface operation and connections to relay Courier User Guide R6512 Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E IEC60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems - Transmission Protocols – Companion Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 1/28 1. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC (PSL) 1.1 Overview The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application. This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers. The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of opto inputs. It is also used to assign the mapping of functions to the opto inputs and output contacts, the outputs of the protection elements, e.g. protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic. The fixed scheme logic provides the relay’s standard protection schemes. The PSL itself consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be programmed to perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any number of inputs. The timers are used either to create a programmable delay, and/or to condition the logic outputs, e.g. to create a pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front panel of the relay and the output contacts at the rear. The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any of its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the part of the PSL logic that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed. This reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL; even with large, complex PSL schemes the relay trip time will not lengthen. This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic design. However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very complex system, hence setting of the PSL is implemented through the PC support package MiCOM S1 Studio. 1.2 MiCOM S1 or MiCOM S1 Studio Px40 PSL editor 1.2.1 Micom S1 V2 To access the Px40 PSL Editor Menu, click on. 1.2.2 MiCOM S1 Studio To access the MiCOM S1 Studio V3 Px40 PSL Editor double click on the PSL file on the Explorer or click PSL Editor (Px40) from Tools Menu 1.2.3 PSL Editor The PSL Editor module enables you to connect to any MiCOM device front port, Rear port with courier protocol and Ethernet port with tunnelled courier protocol, retrieve and edit its Programmable Scheme Logic files and send the modified file back to a MiCOM Px40 device. P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 2/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 1.3 How With the MiCOM Px40 PSL Module you can: IED L file file ut to control logic OM Px40 IED on how to use these functions, please refer to PSL Editor online al. to use MiCOM Px40 PSL editor  Start a new PSL diagram  Extract a PSL file from a MiCOM Px40  Open a diagram from a PS  Add logic components to a PSL file  Move components in a PSL file  Edit link of a PSL file  Add link to a PSL file  Highlight path in a PSL  Use a conditioner outp  Download PSL file to a MiC  Print PSL files  View DDB numbering for the signals For a detailed discussion help or S1 Users manu Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 3/28 1.4 Warnings Before the scheme is sent to the relay checks are done. Various warning messages may be displayed as a result of these checks. The Editor first reads in the model number of the connected relay, and then compares it with the stored model number. A "wildcard" comparison is employed. If a model mismatch occurs then a warning will be generated before sending commences. Both the stored model number and that read-in from the relay are displayed along with the warning; the onus is on you to decide if the settings to be sent are compatible with the connected relay. Wrongly ignoring the warning could lead to undesired behaviour in the relay. If there are any potential problems of an obvious nature then a list will be generated. The types of potential problems that the program attempts to detect are:  One or more gates, LED signals, contact signals, and/or timers have their outputs linked directly back to their inputs. An erroneous link of this sort could lock up the relay, or cause other more subtle problems to arise.  Inputs to Trigger (ITT) exceed the number of inputs. A programmable gate has its ITT value set to greater than the number of actual inputs; the gate can never activate. Note that there is no lower ITT value check. A 0-value does not generate a warning.  Too many gates. There is a theoretical upper limit of 256 gates in a scheme, but the practical limit is determined by the complexity of the logic. In practice the scheme would have to be very complex, and this error is unlikely to occur.  Too many links. There is no fixed upper limit to the number of links in a scheme. However, as with the maximum number of gates, the practical limit is determined by the complexity of the logic. In practice the scheme would have to be very complex, and this error is unlikely to occur. P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 4/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 1.5 Toolbar and commands There are a number of toolbars available for easy navigation and editing of PSL. 1.5.1 Standard tools  For file management and printing. Blank Scheme : Create a blank scheme based on a relay model. Default Configuration : Create a default scheme based on a relay model. Open : Open an existing diagram. Save : Save the active diagram. Print : Display the Windows Print dialog, enabling you to print the current diagram. Undo : Undo the last action. Redo : Redo the previously undone action. Redraw : Redraw the diagram. Number of DDBs : Display the DDB numbers of the links. Calculate CRC : Calculate unique number based on both the function and layout of the logic. Compare Files : Compare current file with another stored on disk. Select : Enable the select function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as an arrow. This is the default mouse pointer. It is sometimes referred to as the selection pointer. Point to a component and click the left mouse button to select it. Several components may be selected by clicking the left mouse button on the diagram and dragging the pointer to create a rectangular selection area. 1.5.2 Alignment tools  To snap logic elements into horizontally or vertically aligned groupings. Align Top : Align all selected components so the top of each is level with the others. Align Middle : Align all selected components so the middle of each is level with the others. Align Bottom : Align all selected components so the bottom of each is level with the others. Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 5/28 Align Left : Align all selected components so the leftmost point of each is level with the others. Align Centre : Align all selected components so the centre of each is level with the others. Align Right : Align all selected components so the rightmost point of each is level with the others. 1.5.3 Drawing Tools  To add text comments and other annotations, for easier reading of PSL schemes. Rectangle : When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want one of the corners to be hold down the left mouse button and move it to where you want the diagonally opposite corner to be. Release the button. To draw a square hold down the SHIFT key to ensure height and width remain the same. Ellipse : When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want one of the corners to be hold down the left mouse button and move until the ellipse is the size you want it to be. Release the button. To draw a circle hold down the SHIFT key to ensure height and width remain the same. Line : When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the line to start, hold down left mouse, move to the position of the end of the line and release button. To draw horizontal or vertical lines only hold down the SHIFT key. Polyline : When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the polyline to start and click the left mouse button. Now move to the next point on the line and click the left button. Double click to indicate the final point in the polyline. Curve : When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the polycurve to start and click the left mouse button. Each time you click the button after this a line will be drawn, each line bisects its associated curve. Double click to end. The straight lines will disappear leaving the polycurve. Note: whilst drawing the lines associated with the polycurve, a curve will not be displayed until either three lines in succession have been drawn or the polycurve line is complete. Text : When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the text to begin and click the left mouse button. To change the font, size or colour, or text attributes select Properties from the right mouse button menu. Image : When selected, the Open dialog is displayed, enabling you to select a bitmap or icon file. Click Open, position the mouse pointer where you want the image to be and click the left mouse button. P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 6/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 1.5.4 Nudge tools  To move logic elements. The nudge tool buttons enable you to shift a selected component a single unit in the selected direction, or five pixels if the SHIFT key is held down. As well as using the tool buttons, single unit nudge actions on the selected components can be achieved using the arrow keys on the keyboard. Nudge Up : Shift the selected component(s) upwards by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units upwards. Nudge Down : Shift the selected component(s) downwards by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units downwards. Nudge Left : Shift the selected component(s) to the left by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units to the left. Nudge Right : Shift the selected component(s) to the right by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units to the right. 1.5.5 Rotation tools  Tools to spin, mirror and flip. Free Rotate : Enable the rotation function. While rotation is active components may be rotated as required. Press the ESC key or click on the diagram to disable the function. Rotate Left : Rotate the selected component 90 degrees to the left. Rotate Right : Rotate the selected component 90 degrees to the right. Flip Horizontal : Flip the component horizontally. Flip Vertical : Flip the component vertically. Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 7/28 1.5.6 Structure tools  To change the stacking order of logic components. The structure toolbar enables you to change the stacking order of components. Bring to Front : Bring the selected components in front of all other components. Send to Back : Bring the selected components behind all other components. Bring Forward : Bring the selected component forward one layer. Send Backward : Send the selected component backwards one layer. 1.5.7 Zoom and pan tools  For scaling the displayed screen size, viewing the entire PSL, or zooming to a selection. Zoom In : Increases the Zoom magnification by 25%. Zoom Out : Decreases the Zoom magnification by 25%. Zoom : Enable the zoom function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as a magnifying glass. Right- clicking will zoom out and left-clicking will zoom in. Press the ESC key to return to the selection pointer. Click and drag to zoom in to an area. Zoom to Fit : Display at the highest magnification that will show all the diagram’s components. Zoom to Selection : Display at the highest magnification that will show the selected component(s). Pan : Enable the pan function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as a hand. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer across the diagram to pan. Press the ESC key to return to the selection pointer. 1.5.8 Logic symbols This toolbar provides icons to place each type of logic element into the scheme diagram. Not all elements are available in all devices. Icons will only be displayed for those elements available in the selected device. Link : C reate a Link between two logic symbols. Opto Signal : Create an Opto Signal: Input Signal : Create an Input Signal. P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 8/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Output Signal : Create an Output Signal. GOOSE in : Create an input signal to logic to receive a GOOSE message transmitted from another IED. Used in either UCA2.0 or IEC 61850 GOOSE applications only. GOOSE out : Create an output signal from logic to transmit a GOOSE message to another IED. Used in either UCA2.0 or IEC 61850 GOOSE applications only. Integral Tripping in : Create an input signal to logic that receives an InterMiCOM message transmitted from another IED. Integral Tripping out : Create an output signal from logic that transmits an InterMiCOM message to another IED. Control in : Create an input signal to logic that can be operated from an external command. Function Key : Create a Function Key input signal. Trigger Signal : Create a Fault Record Trigger. LED Signal or : Create an LED Signal. Icon shown is dependent upon capability of LED’s i.e. mono-colour or tri-colour. Contact Signal : Create a Contact Signal. LED Conditioner or : Create an LED Conditioner. Icon shown is dependent upon capability of LED’s i.e. mono-colour or tri-colour. Contact Conditioner : Create a Contact Conditioner. Timer : Create a Timer. AND Gate : Create an AND Gate. OR Gate : Create an OR Gate. Programmable Gate : Create a Programmable Gate. 1.6 PSL logic signals properties The logic signal toolbar is used for the selection of logic signals. Performing a right-mouse click on any logic signal will open a context sensitive menu and one of the options for certain logic elements is the Properties… command. Selecting the Properties option will open a Component Properties window, the format of which will vary according to the logic signal selected. Properties of each logic signal, including the Component Properties windows, are shown in the following sub-sections: Signal properties menu The Signals List tab is used for the selection of logic signals. The signals listed will be appropriate to the type of logic symbol being added to the diagram. They will be of one of the following types: Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 9/28 1.6.1 Link properties Links form the logical link between the output of a signal, gate or condition and the input to any element. Any link that is connected to the input of a gate can be inverted via its properties window. An inverted link is indicated with a “bubble” on the input to the gate. It is not possible to invert a link that is not connected to the input of a gate. Rules for Linking Symbols Links can only be started from the output of a signal, gate, or conditioner, and can only be ended on an input to any element. Since signals can only be either an input or an output then the concept is somewhat different. In order to follow the convention adopted for gates and conditioners, input signals are connected from the left and output signals to the right. The Editor will automatically enforce this convention. A link attempt will be refused where one or more rules would otherwise be broken. A link will be refused for the following reasons:  An attempt to connect to a signal that is already driven. The cause of the refusal may not be obvious, since the signal symbol may appear elsewhere in the diagram. Use “Highlight a Path” to find the other signal.  An attempt is made to repeat a link between two symbols. The cause of the refusal may not be obvious, since the existing link may be represented elsewhere in the diagram. 1.6.2 Opto signal properties Opto Signal Each opto input can be selected and used for programming in PSL. Activation of the opto input will drive an associated DDB signal. For example activating opto input L1 will assert DDB 032 in the PSL. 1.6.3 Input signal properties Input Signal Relay logic functions provide logic output signals that can be used for programming in PSL. Depending on the relay functionality, operation of an active relay function will drive an associated DDB signal in PSL. For example DDB 1142 will be asserted in the PSL should the active terminal1 earth fault , stage 1 protection operate/trip. DDB #1142 T1 IN>1 Tri p P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 10/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 1.6.4 Output signal properties Output Signal Relay logic functions provide logic input signals that can be used for programming in PSL. Depending on the relay functionality, activation of the output signal will drive an associated DDB signal in PSL and cause an associated response to the relay function For example, if DDB 651 is asserted in the PSL, it will block the terminal1 earth function stage 1 timer. DDB #651 T1 IN>1 Ti meBl k 1.6.5 GOOSE input signal properties GOOSE In The Programmable Scheme Logic interfaces with the GOOSE Scheme Logic (see PSL Editor online help or S1 Users manual for more details) by means of 32 Virtual inputs. The Virtual Inputs can be used in much the same way as the Opto Input signals. The logic that drives each of the Virtual Inputs is contained within the relay’s GOOSE Scheme Logic file. It is possible to map any number of bit-pairs, from any subscribed device, using logic gates onto a Virtual Input (see S1 Users manual for more details). For example DDB 832 will be asserted in PSL should virtual input 1 operate. 1.6.6 GOOSE output signal properties GOOSE Out The Programmable Scheme Logic interfaces with the GOOSE Scheme Logic by means of 32 Virtual outputs. It is possible to map virtual outputs to bit-pairs for transmitting to any published devices (see PSL Editor online help or S1 Users manual for more details). For example if DDB 865 is asserted in PSL, Virtual Output 32 and its associated mappings will operate. 1.6.7 Control in signal properties Control In There are 32 control inputs which can be activated via the relay menu, ‘hotkeys’ or via rear communications. Depending on the programmed setting i.e. latched or pulsed, an associated DDB signal will be activated in PSL when a control input is operated. For example operate control input 1 to assert DDB 800 in the PSL. Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 11/28 1.6.8 Function key properties Function Key Each function key can be selected and used for programming in PSL. Activation of the function key will drive an associated DDB signal and the DDB signal will remain active depending on the programmed setting i.e. toggled or normal. Toggled mode means the DDB signal will remain latched or unlatched on key press and normal means the DDB will only be active for the duration of the key press. For example operate function key 1 to assert DDB 712 in the PSL. 1.6.9 Fault recorder trigger properties Fault Record Trigger The fault recording facility can be activated, by driving the fault recorder trigger DDB signal. For example assert DDB 144 to activate the fault recording in the PSL. 1.6.10 LED signal properties LED All programmable LEDs will drive associated DDB signal when the LED is activated. For example DDB 652 will be asserted when LED 7 is activated. 1.6.11 Contact signal properties Contact Signal All relay output contacts will drive associated DDB signal when the output contact is activated. For example DDB 009 will be asserted when output R10 is activated. 1.6.12 LED conditioner properties LED Conditioner 1. Select the LED name from the list (only shown when inserting a new symbol). 2. Configure the LED output to be Red, Yellow or Green. Configure a Green LED by driving the Green DDB input. Configure a RED LED by driving the RED DDB input. Configure a Yellow LED by driving the RED and GREEN DDB inputs simultaneously. P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 12/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 3. Configure the LED output to be latching or non-latching. 1.6.13 Contact conditioner properties Each contact can be conditioned with an associated timer that can be selected for pick up, drop off, dwell, pulse, pick-up/drop-off, straight-through, or latching operation. “Straight-through” means it is not conditioned in any way whereas “latching” is used to create a sealed-in or lockout type function. 1. Select the contact name from the Contact Name list (only shown when inserting a new symbol). 2. Choose the conditioner type required in the Mode tick list. 3. Set the Pick-up Time (in milliseconds), if required. 4. Set the Drop-off Time (in milliseconds), if required. Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 13/28 1.6.14 Timer properties Each timer can be selected for pick up, drop off, dwell, pulse or pick-up/drop-off operation. 1. Choose the operation mode from the Timer Mode tick list. 2. Set the Pick-up Time (in milliseconds), if required. 3. Set the Drop-off Time (in milliseconds), if required. 1.6.15 Gate properties A Gate may be an AND, OR, programmable gate or SR Latch . An AND gate requires that all inputs are TRUE for the output to be TRUE. An OR gate requires that one or more input is TRUE for the output to be TRUE. A Programmable gate requires that the number of inputs that are TRUE is equal to or greater than its ‘Inputs to Trigger’ setting for the output to be TRUE. Three variants of the SR latch gate are available. They are:  Standard – no input dominant  Set Input Dominant  Reset Input Dominant The output of the gate, Q is latched, i.e. its state is non-volatile upon power cycle. The inversions of the input and output signals are supported. The state of Q is reset when a new PSL is downloaded to the relay or when the active setting group is changed. The maximum number of SR Latch gates is 64. The evaluation of the Q state is carried out after all the DDB changes have completed, i.e. at the end of the protection cycle and synchronised with protection task. Hence there is an inherent delay of a protection cycle in processing every one of the SR gates and the delay increases if the SR gates are connected one after another. The user has to be aware that if there is a timer before the SR gate, then an additional delay of a protection cycle will be incurred before the Q state is changed. The logic operations of the three variants of the gate are depicted in the diagram below: P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 14/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 S R Q S R Q 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 no change / last state 1 1 no change / last state Standard SD R Q S R Q 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 no change / last state 1 1 1 Set Input Dominant S RD Q S R Q 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 no change / last state 1 1 0 Reset Input Dominant P0737ENa 1. Select the Gate type AND, OR, or Programmable. 2. Set the number of inputs to trigger when Programmable is selected. 3. Select if the output of the gate should be inverted using the Invert Output check box. An inverted output is indicated with a "bubble" on the gate output. Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 15/28 2. MiCOM PX40 GOOSE EDITOR To access to Px40 GOOSE Editor menu click on The implementation of UCA2.0 Generic Object Orientated Substation Events (GOOSE) sets the way for cheaper and faster inter-relay communications. UCA2.0 GOOSE is based upon the principle of reporting the state of a selection of binary (i.e. ON or OFF) signals to other devices. In the case of Px40 relays, these binary signals are derived from the Programmable Scheme Logic Digital Data Bus signals. UCA2.0 GOOSE messages are event-driven. When a monitored point changes state, e.g. from logic 0 to logic 1, a new message is sent. GOOSE Editor enables you to connect to any UCA 2.0 MiCOM Px40 device via the Courier front port, retrieve and edit its GOOSE settings and send the modified file back to a MiCOM Px40 device. Menu and Toolbar The menu functions The main functions available within the Px40 GOOSE Editor menu are:  File  Edit  View  Device P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 16/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 File menu Open… Displays the Open file dialogue box, enabling you to locate and open an existing GOOSE configuration file. Save Save the current file. Save As… Save the current file with a new name or in a new location. Print… Print the current GOOSE configuration file. Print Preview Preview the hardcopy output with the current print setup. Print Setup… Display the Windows Print Setup dialogue box allowing modification of the printer settings. Exit Quit the application. Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 17/28 Edit menu Rename… Rename the selected IED. New Enrolled IED… Add a new IED to the GOOSE configuration. New Virtual Input… Add a new Virtual Input to the GOOSE In mapping configuration. New Mapping… Add a new bit-pair to the Virtual Input logic. Delete Enrolled IED Remove an existing IED from the GOOSE configuration. Delete Virtual Input Delete the selected Virtual Input from the GOOSE In mapping configuration. Delete Mapping Remove a mapped bit-pair from the Virtual Input logic. Reset Bitpair Remove current configuration from selected bit-pair. Delete All Delete all mappings, enrolled IED’s and Virtual Inputs from the current GOOSE configuration file. P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 18/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 View menu Toolbar Show/hide the toolbar. Status Bar Show/hide the status bar. Properties… Show associated properties for the selected item. Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 19/28 Device menu Open Connection Display the Establish Connection dialog, enabling you to send and receive data from the connected relay. Close Connection Closes active connection to a relay. Send to Relay Send the open GOOSE configuration file to the connected relay. Receive from Relay Extract the current GOOSE configuration from the connected relay. Communications Setup Displays the Local Communication Settings dialogue box, enabling you to select or configure the communication settings. P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 20/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 The toolbar Open Opens an existing GOOSE configuration file. Save Save the active document. Print Display the Print Options dialog, enabling you to print the current configuration. View Properties Show associated properties for the selected item. How to Use the GOOSE Editor The main functions available within the GOOSE Editor module are:  Retrieve GOOSE configuration settings from an IED  Configure GOOSE settings  Send GOOSE configuration settings to an IED  Save IED GOOSE setting files  Print IED GOOSE setting files Retrieve GOOSE configuration settings from an IED 1. Open a connection to the required device by selecting Open Connection from the Device menu. Refer to Section 2.1.1.6 & 2.1.1.7 for details on configuring the IED communication settings. 2. Enter the device address in the Establish Connection dialogue box. 3. Enter the relay password. 4. Extract the current GOOSE configuration settings from the device by selecting Receive from Relay from the Device menu. 2.1 Configure GOOSE settings The GOOSE Scheme Logic editor is used to enrol devices and also to provide support for mapping the Digital Data Bus signals (from the Programmable Scheme Logic) onto the UCA2.0 GOOSE bit-pairs. If the relay is interested in data from other UCA2.0 GOOSE devices, their "Sending IED" names are added as ’enrolled’ devices within the GOOSE Scheme Logic. The GOOSE Scheme Logic editor then allows the mapping of incoming UCA2.0 GOOSE message bit- pairs onto Digital Data Bus signals for use within the Programmable Scheme Logic. UCA2.0 GOOSE is normally disabled in the MiCOM Px40 products and is enabled by downloading a GOOSE Scheme Logic file that is customised. 2.2 Device naming Each UCA2.0 GOOSE enabled device on the network transmits messages using a unique "Sending IED" name. Select Rename from the Edit menu to assign the "Sending IED" name to the device. Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 21/28 2.3 Enrolling IED’s Enrolling a UCA2.0 GOOSE device is done through the Px40s GOOSE Scheme Logic. If a relay is interested in receiving data from a device, the "Sending IED" name is simply added to the relays list of ’interested devices’. Select New Enrolled IED from the Edit menu and enter the GOOSE IED name (or "Sending IED" name) of the new device. Enrolled IED’s have GOOSE In settings containing DNA (Dynamic Network Announcement) and User Status bit-pairs. These input signals can be configured to be passed directly through to the Virtual Input gates or be set to a forced or default state before processing by the Virtual Input logic. The signals in the GOOSE In settings of enrolled IED’s are mapped to Virtual Inputs by selecting New Mapping from the Edit menu. Refer to section below for use of these signals in logic. 2.4 GOOSE In settings Virtual inputs The GOOSE Scheme Logic interfaces with the Programmable Scheme Logic by means of 32 Virtual Inputs. The Virtual Inputs are then used in much the same way as the Opto Input signals. The logic that drives each of the Virtual Inputs is contained within the relay’s GOOSE Scheme Logic file. It is possible to map any number of bit-pairs, from any enrolled device, using logic gates onto a Virtual Input. P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 22/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 The following gate types are supported within the GOOSE Scheme Logic: Gate Type Operation AND The GOOSE Virtual Input will only be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when all bit- pairs match the desired state. OR The GOOSE Virtual Input will be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when any bit- pair matches its desired state. PROGRAMMABLE The GOOSE Virtual Input will only be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when the majority of the bit-pairs match their desired state. To add a Virtual Input to the GOOSE logic configuration, select New Virtual Input from the Edit menu and configure the input number. If required, the gate type can be changed once input mapping to the Virtual Input has been made. Mapping GOOSE In signals from enrolled IED’s are mapped to logic gates by selection of the required bit-pair from either the DNA or User Status section of the inputs. The value required for a logic 1 or ON state is specified in the State box. The input can be inverted by checking Input Inversion (equivalent to a NOT input to the logic gate). GOOSE Out settings The structure of information transmitted via UCA2.0 GOOSE is defined by the ’Protection Action’ (PACT) common class template, defined by GOMFSE (Generic Object Models for Substation and Feeder Equipment). A UCA2.0 GOOSE message transmitted by a Px40 relay can carry up to 96 Digital Data Bus signals, where the monitored signals are characterised by a two-bit status value, or "bit-pair". The value transmitted in the bit-pair is customisable although GOMFSE recommends the following assignments: Bit-Pair Value Represents 00 A transitional or unknown state 01 A logical 0 or OFF state 10 A logical 1 or ON state 11 An invalid state The PACT common class splits the contents of a UCA2.0 GOOSE message into two main parts; 32 DNA bit-pairs and 64 User Status bit-pairs. The DNA bit-pairs are intended to carry GOMSFE defined protection scheme information, where supported by the device. MiCOM Px40 implementation provides full end-user flexibility, as it is possible to assign any Digital Data Bus signal to any of the 32 DNA bit- Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 23/28 pairs. The User Status bit pairs are intended to carry all ‘user-defined’ state and control information. As with the DNA, it is possible to assign any Digital Data Bus signal to these bit- pairs. To ensure full compatibility with third party UCA2.0 GOOSE enabled products, it is recommended that the DNA bit-pair assignments are as per the definition given in GOMFSE. Send GOOSE configuration settings to an IED 1. Open a connection to the required device by selecting Open Connection from the Device menu. Refer to Section 2.1.1.6 & 2.1.1.7 for details on configuring the IED communication settings. 2. Enter the device address in the Establish Connection dialogue box. 3. Enter the relay password. 4. Send the current GOOSE configuration settings to the device by selecting Send to Relay from the Device menu. Save IED GOOSE setting files Select Save or Save As from the File menu. Print IED GOOSE setting files 1. Select Print from the File menu. 2. The Print Options dialogue is displayed allowing formatting of the printed file to be configured. 3. Click OK after making required selections. P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 24/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 3. DEFAULT PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (PSL) & DDB #111 TPAR Enable DDB #071 Opto Label 08 DDB #064 Opto Label 01 DDB #129 DEF. Chan Recv DDB #065 Opto Label 02 DDB #130 DIST. COS DDB #067 Opto Label 04 DDB #117 BAR DDB #069 Opto Label 06 DDB #122 Man. Close CB DDB #128 DIST. Chan Recv DDB #131 DEF. COS DDB #066 Opto Label 03 DDB #134 MCB/VTS Main DDB #068 Opto Label 05 DDB #119 CB Healthy DDB #070 Opto Label 07 DDB #148 Reset Lockout DDB #110 SPAR Enable Example - MICOM P444 46 outputs - Programmable Logic Input-Opto Couplers Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 25/28 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 01 DDB #000 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 02 DDB #001 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 03 DDB #002 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 04 DDB #003 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 05 DDB #004 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 10 DDB #009 DDB #100 Latching LED 5 1 & 1 1 & 1 DDB #242 DIST Sig. Send DDB #271 DEF Sig. Send DDB #255 Z1 DDB #246 DIST Trip A DDB #247 DIST Trip B DDB #248 DIST Trip C DDB #255 Z1 DDB #256 Z1X DDB #257 Z2 DDB #258 Z3 DDB #259 Z4 DDB #260 Zp DDB #243 DIST UNB CR DDB #255 Z1 DDB #256 Z1X DDB #326 Any Trip B DDB #325 Any Trip A DDB #327 Any Trip C Led Trip Z1 Dist Aided Trip Trip A Trip B Trip C Signal Send (Dist + DEF) Output Contact P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 26/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 06 DDB #005 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 07 DDB #006 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 08 DDB #007 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 09 DDB #008 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 11 DDB #010 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 12 DDB #011 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 13 DDB #012 Straight 0 0 Relay Label 14 DDB #013 Dwell 20 0 DDB #099 Latching LED 4 1 1 1 DDB #278 DEF Trip A DDB #279 DEF Trip B DDB #280 DEF Trip C DDB #282 IN>2 Trip DDB #355 IN>3 Trip DDB #224 A/R 1P In Prog DDB #225 A/R 3P In Prog DDB #468 Fault_REC_TRIG DDB #321 Any Trip DDB #269 Power Swing DDB #317 Any Start DDB #321 Any Trip DDB #174 General Alarm DDB #234 A/R Lockout DDB #223 A/R Close Output Contact Led General Start Starting Fault Recorder General Start General trip General Alarm Trip DEF + SBEF AR Lockout AR in Progress AR Close Power Swing Configuration / mapping P44x/EN GC/H75 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Page 27/28 DDB #096 Latching LED 1 DDB #097 Latching LED 2 DDB #098 Latching LED 3 DDB #101 Latching LED 6 DDB #102 Latching LED 7 DDB #103 Non - Latching LED 8 DDB #326 Any Trip B DDB #244 DIST Fwd DDB #231 A/R Enable DDB #325 Any Trip A DDB #327 Any Trip C DDB #245 DIST Rev Leds Front Panel Trip A Trip B Trip C Forward Reverse A/R Enable P44x/EN GC/H75 Configuration / mapping Page 28/28 MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Menu Content Tables P44x/EN HI/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 MENU CONTENT TABLES P44x/EN HI/H75 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Menu Content Tables P44x/EN HI/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444) Page 1/12 Description MiCOM   Plant Reference ALSTOM   0.000 V 0.000 A 50.00Hz   0.000 W 0.000 Var   16:26:14 18 Mar 2004   System Data   View Records   Measurements 1   Measurements 2   Measurements 3   CB Condition   CB Control   Date and Time   Configuration   CT and VT ratios   Record control   Disturb Recorder   Measure't setup   Communications   Commission tests   CB monitor setup   Opto config   Control Input   CTRL I/P config   Intermicom comms   Intermicom conf   Function keys   Ethernet NCIT   IED Configurator   CTRL I/P label   Distance group 1   Distance schemes group 1   Power swing group 1   Back-up I> group 1   NEG sequence O/C group 1   Broken conductor group 1   Earth fault O/C group 1   Aided D.E.F group 1   Thermal overload group 1   Residual overvoltage group 1   Zero seq. Power group 1   I< protection group 1   Volt protection group 1   Freq protection group 1   CB Fail & I< Group 1   System check group 1   Autoreclose group 1   Input labels group 1   Output labels group 1   PSL DATA  Notes: This Menu Content table is given for complete menu enabled (i.e. if the corresponding option in the configuration menu is enabled). Some options or menu could not appear according to the installation. Group 1 is shown on the menu map, Groups 2, 3 and 4 are identical to Group 1 and therefore omitted. P44x/EN HI/H75 Menu Content Tables Page 2/12 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 SYSTEM DATA VIEW RECORDS MEASUREMENTS 1 Language Select Event Fault location IA Magnitude VAN Magnitude English [0…256] 0 0 A 0 V Password Menu Cell Ref Fault location IA Phase Angle VAN Phase Angle XXXX (From Record) 0 o 0 o Description Time & Date Fault location IB Magnitude VBN Magnitude MiCOM (From Record) 0 A 0 V Plant Reference Event Text IA IB Phase Angle VBN Phase Angle ALSTOM 0 o 0 o Model Number Event Value IB IC Magnitude VCN Magnitude P442311B1M0300J 0 A 0 V Serial Number Select Fault IC IC Phase Angle VCN Phase Angle 123456A [0…4] 0 0 o 0 o Frequency Active Group VAN IN Derived Mag VN Derived Mag 50 0 0 A 0 V Comms Level Select Maintenance VBN IN Derived Angle VN Derived Ang 2 [0…0] 0 0 o 0 o Relay Address Alarm Status 1 Faulted phase VCN I1 Magnitude V1 Magnitude 255 0000000000000000 0 A 0 V Plant Status Relay Status 1 Start Elements Fault Resistance I2 Magnitude V2 Magnitude 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0 A 0 V Control Status Alarm Status 1 Validities Fault in Zone I0 Magnitude V0 Magnitude 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0 A 0 V Active Group Alarm Status 2 Time Stamp Trip Elements 2 VAB Magnitude Frequency 1 0000000000000000 0 V 0 CB Trip/Close Alarm Status 3 Fault Alarms Start Elements 2 VAB Phase Angle C/S Voltage Mag No Operation 0000000000000000 0 o 0 V Software Ref. 1 Access Level System Frequency Select Report VBC Magnitude C/S Voltage Ang xxx 2 0 V 0 o Software Ref.2 Password Control Fault Duration Report Text VBC Phase Angle IM Magnitude xxx 2 0 o 0 A Opto I/P Status Password Level 1 Relay trip Time Maint Type VCA Magnitude IM Angle 0001100100001000 **** 0 V 0 o Relay Status 1 Password Level 2 Fault location Maint Data VCA Phase Angle Slip Frequency 0000000000000000 **** 0 o 50 Hz Reset indication Menu Content Tables P44x/EN HI/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444) Page 3/12 MEASUREMENTS2 CB CONDITION CB CONTROL DATEand TIME CONFIGURATION A Phase Watts Thermal Status CBA Operations CB Control by Date Restore Defaults 0 W 0.00 % 0 Opto + Rem + Local 01 June 2005 No Operation B Phase Watts Reset Thermal CBB Operations Close Pulse Time Time Setting Group 0 W No 0 0.5 ms 16:25:53 Select via Menu C Phase Watts CBC Operations Trip Pulse Time IRIG-BSync Active Settings 0 W 0 0.5 ms Disabled Group 1 A Phase VArs Total IA Broken Man Close Delay IRIG-BStatus Save Changes 0 Var 0 A 10 s 0 No Operation B Phase VArs Total IB Broken Healthy Window Battery Status Copy From 0 Var 0 A 5 s Healthy Group 1 C Phase VArs Total IC Broken C/ SWindow Battery Alarm Copy to 0 Var 0 A 5 s Enabled No Operation A Phase VA CBOperate Time A/ RSingle Pole SNTPStatus Setting Group 1 0 VA 0 s Disabled Enabled B Phase VA Reset CBData A/ RThree Pole LocalTime Enable Setting Group 2 0 VA No Disabled Fixed Disabled C Phase VA Total 1PReclose LocalTime Offset Setting Group 3 0 VA 0 0 Disabled 3 Phase Watts Total 3PReclose DST Enable Setting Group 4 0 W 0 Enabled Disabled 3 Phase VArs Reset Total A/ R DST Offset Dist. Protection 0 Var No 60.00 min Enabled 3 Phase VA DST End Month DST Start Power-Swing 0 VA October Last Enabled Zero Seq Power 3 Ph W Fix Dem DST End Mins DST Start Day Back-Up I> 0 0 Wh 60.00 min Sunday Disabled 3Ph Power Factor 3Ph Vars Fix Dem RP1 Time Zone DST Start Month Neg Sequence O/ C 0 0 Varh Local March Disabled APh Power Factor 3Ph W Peak Dem RP2 Time Zone DST Start Mins Broken Conductor 0 0 Wh Local 60.00 min Disabled BPh Power Factor 3Ph VArs Peak Dem DNPOETime Zone DST End Earth Fault Prot 0 0 Varh Local Last Zero Seq. Power Earth Fault O/ C CPh Power Factor Reset Demand Tunnel Time Zone DST End Day Disabled 0 Wh No Local Sunday MEASUREMENTS3 P44x/EN HI/H75 Menu Content Tables Page 4/12 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 CT AND VT RATIOS RECORD CONTROL MEASURE'T SETUP Aided D.E.F Main VT Primary Clear Events Duration Default Display Enabled 110.0 V No 1.500 s Description Volt Protection Main VT Sec'y Clear Faults Trigger Position Local Values Disabled 110.0 V No 33.30 % Secondary CB Fail & I< C/ SVT Primary Clear Maint Trigger Mode Remote Values Enabled 110.0 V No Single Primary Supervision C/ SVT Secondary Alarm Event Analog Channel 1 Measurement Ref Enabled 110.0 V Enabled VA VA System Checks Phase CT Primary Relay O/ PEvent Analog Channel 2 Measurement Mode Disabled 1 A Enabled VB 0 Thermal Overload Phase CT Sec'y Opto Input Event Analog Channel 3 Demand Interval Disabled 1 A Enabled VC 30.00 mins I< Protection Mcomp CT Primary System event Analog Channel 4 Distance Unit Disabled 1 A Enabled VN Kilometres Residual O/ V NVD Commission Tests Mcomp CT Sec'y Fault Rec Event Analog Channel 5 Fault Location Disabled Invisible 1 A Enabled IA Distance Freq protection Setting Values C/ SInput Maint Rec Event Analog Channel 6 Disabled Secondary A-N Enabled IB Internal A/ R Control inputs Main VT Location Protection Event Analog Channel 7 Disabled Visible Line Enabled IC Input Labels Ctrl I/ PConfig CT Polarity Clear Dist -Recs Analog Channel 8 Visible Visible Line Decs No IN Output Labels Ctrl I/ PLabels DDBelement 31 - 0 Digital Input 1 Visible Visible 1111111111111111 Relay Label 01 CT & VT Ratios Direct Access DDBelement 63 - 32 Input 1 Trigger Visible Enabled 1111111111111111 No Trigger Record Control InterMicom Invisible Disabled Disturb Recorder Ethernet NCIT DDB element 2047-2016 Digital Input 32 Invisible Visible 1111111111111111 Not used Measure't Setup Function key Input 32 Trigger Invisible Visible No trigger Comms Settings LCD Contrast Visible 11 DISTURB RECORDER Menu Content Tables P44x/EN HI/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444) Page 5/12 COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Protocol Opto I/ PStatus Broken I^ Global Nominal V Ctrl I/ PStatus Courier 0001011001000011 2 24-27V 0000000000000000 RP1 Address Relay Status 1 I^ Maintenance Opto Filter Cntl Ctrl Input 1 255 0001011001000011 Alarm Disabled 11111111111 No Operation RP1 Address Test Port Status I^ Maintenance Opto Input 1 1 00010110 1.000 KA 24-27V RP1 Address LED Status I^ Lockout Ctrl Input 32 1 00010110 Alarm Disabled No Operation RP1 Address Monitor Bit 1 I^ Lockout Opto Input 32 1 Relay Label 01 2.000 KA 24-27V RP1 Inactiv Timer N°CB Ops Maint 15.00 mins Alarm Disabled Monitor Bit 8 Baud Rate RP1 Port Config Relay Label 08 N°CB Ops Maint 19200 bits/ s K Bus 10 Test Mode Baud Rate RP1 Comms Mode Disabled N°CB Ops Lock 19200 bits/ s IEC60870 FT1.2 Alarm Disabled Test Pattern 1 Baud Rate RP1 Baud Rate 0 N°CB Ops Lock 19200 bits/ s 19200 bits/ s 20 Test Pattern 2 Parity Scale Value 0 CB Time Maint None IEC61850 Alarm Disabled Contact Test Parity Message Gap (ms) No Operation CB Time Maint None 0 100.0 ms Test LEDs Measure't Period NIC Protocol No Operation CB Time Lockout 10 IEC64850 Alarm Disabled Autoreclose Test Physical Link NIC MAC Address No Operation CB Time Lockout RS485 200.0 ms Red LED Status Time Sync NIC Tunl Timeout Fault Freq Lock Disabled 5 min Alarm Disabled Green LED Status CS103 Blocking NIC Link Report Fault Freq Count Disabled Alarm 10 DDB 31-00 RP1 Status NIC Link Timeout Fault Freq Time Reset Lockout by 60s 3.600 Ks CB Close Lockout Reset Man Close RstDly DDB 2047-2016 No 5 s CONTROL INPUT OPTO CONFIG COMMISSION TESTS CB MONITOR SETUP P44x/EN HI/H75 Menu Content Tables Page 6/12 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Hotkey Enabled IM Input Status IM Msg Alarm Lvl Kn Key Status Physical link Switch Conf.Bank 111--111--111 25 Electrical No Action Control Input 1 IM Output Status IM1 Cmd Type Fn Key 1 Antialiasing Fil Active Conf.Name Latched Direct Unlocked Disabled Ctrl Command 1 Source Address IM1 Fallback Mode Fn Key 1 Mode Merge Unit Delay Active Conf.Rev Set/ Reset 1 Default Toggled 0 Received Address IM1 Default Value Fn Key 1 Label L.N. Arrangement Inact.Conf.Name 2 0 Function key 1 LN1 Ctrl Command 32 Baud rate IM1 FrameSyncTim Logic Node 1 Inact.Conf.Rev Set/ Reset 9600 1,5 Logical Node 1 Remove Device Fn Key 10 Logic Node 1B IPPARAMETERS Px30 Unlocked Logical Node 2 Ch Statistics IM8 Cmd Type Fn Key 10 Mode Logic Node 2 IPAddress Invisible Direct Toggled Logical Node 3 Rx Direct Count IM8 Fallback Mode Fn Key 10 Label Logic Node 2B Subnet mask Default Function key 1 Logical Node 4 Rx Block Count IM8 Default Value Synchro Alarm Gateway 0 0 Rx NewDataCount IM8 FrameSyncTim IPPARAMETERS 1,5 Rx ErroredCount IPaddress Lost Messages Message status Subnet mask Elapsed Time Channel Status Gateway Reset Statistics IM H/ W Status SNTPPARAM- no ETERS Ch Diagnostics Loopback Mode SNTPServer 1 Invisible Disabled Data CD Status Test Pattern SNTPServer 2 256 FrameSync Status Loopback Status ETHERNET NCIT CTRL I/ PCONFIG IED CONFIGURATOR INTERMICOM COMMS INTERMICOM CONF FUNCTION KEYS Menu Content Tables P44x/EN HI/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444) Page 7/12 Control Input 1 Line Setting R2Ph Zone Q - Direct Program Mode WI: Single Pole Control Input 1 Group 1 20  Directional Fwd Standard Scheme Disabled Line Length tZ2 kZq Res Comp Standard Mode WI : V< Thres. 100 km / Miles 200 ms 1.000 Basic + Z1X 45 V Control Input 32 Line Impedance kZ3/ 4 Res Comp kZq Angle Fault Type WI : Trip Time Delay Control Input 32 12  1.000 0 ° Both Enabled Line Angle kZ3/ 4 Angle Zq Trip Mode PAP: Tele Trip En 70 ° 0 ° 27  Force 3 Poles Disabled Zone Setting Z3 RqG Sig. Send Zone PAP: Del. Trip En Group 1 30  27  Zone Status R3G - R4G RqPh DistCR PAP: P1 110110 30  27  None Disabled kZ1 Res Comp R3Ph - R4Ph tZq Tp PAP: 1PTime Del 1.000 30  0,5  20.0 ms 500 ms kZ1 Angle tZ3 OTHERPARA- tReversal Guard PAP: P2 0 ° 600 ms METERS 20.0 ms Disabled IEC61850 SCL Z1 Z4 Serial Comp Line Unblocking Logic PAP: P3 10  40  Disabled None Disabled IED Name Z1X tZ4 Overlap Z Mode TOR-SOTF Mode PAP3PTime Del 15  1.000 s Disabled 2.000 s IEC61850 Goose R1G Zone P- Direct. Z1m Tilt Angle SOFT Delay PAP: IN Thres 10  Directional Fwd o 0 ° 110 s 500.0 mA GolD R1Ph kZp Res Comp Z1p Tilt Angle Z1Ext Fail PAP; K (%Un) 10  1.000 0 ° Disabled 0.500 GoENA tZ1 kZp Angle Z2/ Zp/ Zq Tilt Angle Weak Infeed Loss Of Load Disabled 0 s 0 ° 0 ° Group 1 Group 1 Test Mode kZ2 Res Comp Zp Fwd Z Chgt Delay WI :Mode Status LoL: Mode Status Disabled 1.000 25  30.00 ms Disabled/ PAP/ Trip Echo Disabled VOPTest Patern kZ2 Angle RpG Umem Validity LoL. Chan. Fail 0x00000000 0 ° 25  10 s Disabled Ignore Test Flag Z2 RpPh Earth Detect kZm Mutual Comp LoL: I< No 20  25  0.05*I1 s 0 R2G tZp Fault Locator kZm Angle LoL: Window 20  400 ms Group 1 0 ° 60 ms 40ms 500 mA 00000000110000 None Disabled CTRL I/ P LABEL DISTANCE GROUP1 DISTANCESCHEMES GROUP1 P44x/EN HI/H75 Menu Content Tables Page 8/12 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 BROKEN CONDUCTOR GROUP1 Delta R I> 1 Function I2> 1 Function Broken Conductor 500 m DT DT Enabled Delta X I> 1 Directional I2> 1 Directional I2/ I1 Setting 500 m Directional Fwd Non-Directional 0,2 IN > Status I> 1 VTSBlock I2> 1 VTSBlock I2> 2 Time Dial I2/ I1 Time Delay Enabled Non-Directional Block 1 60 s IN > (%Imax) I> 1 Current Set I2> 1 Current Set I2> 2 Reset Char I2/ I1 Trip 40 % 200 mA Disabled I2 > Status I> 1 Time Delay VTS I2> 1 Time Delay I2> 2 tRESET 10 s I2 > (%Imax) I> 1 TMS I2> 1 Time Delay VTS I2> 3 Status 30 % 1 200 ms Imax Line > Status I> 1 Time Dial I2> 1 TMS I2> 3 Directional Enabled 7 1 Imax Line> I> 1 Reset Char I2> 1 Time Dial I2> 3 VTSBlock 3.000 A DT 1 Delta I Status I> 1 tRESET I2> 1 Rest Char I2> 3 Current Set Enabled 0 s DT Unblocking Delay I> 2 Function I2> 1 treset I2> 3 Time Delay 30.0 s DT 0 s Blocking Zones I> 2 Directional I> 2 tRESET I2> 2 Function I2> 4 Status 00000 Non-Directional 0 s DT Out Of Step I> 2 VTSBlock I> 3 Status I2> 2 Directional I2> 4 Directional 1 Non-Directional Enabled Non Directional Stable Swing I> 2 Current Set I> 3 Current Set I2> 2 VTSBlock I2> 4 VTSBlock 1 2 A 3 A Block I> 2 Time Delay VTS I> 3 Time Delay I2> 2 Current Set I2> 4 VTSBlock 2 s 3 s 200 mA I> 2 TMS I> 4 Status I2> 2 Time Delay I2> 4 Time Delay 1 Disabled 10 s I> 2 Time Dial I> 4 Current Set I2> 2 Time Delay VTS I2> 4 Time Delay VTS 7 4 A 200 ms I> 2 Reset Char I> 4 Time Delay I2> 2 TMS I2> Char Angle DT 4 s 1 POWER-SWING GROUP1 1.500 A 1.000 s Enabled NEG SEQUENCEO/ C GROUP1 BACK-UPI> GROUP1 Menu Content Tables P44x/EN HI/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444) Page 9/12 EARTH FAULT O/ C GROUP1 AIDED D.E.F. GROUP1 THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP1 RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE GROUP1 ZERO SEQ. POWER GROUP1 I< PROTECTION GROUP1 IN> 1 Function Channel Aided DEF Status Characteristic VN>1 Function Zero Seq. Power I< MODE DT Enabled Simple/ Dual DT Status Enabled 00 IN> 1 Directional Polarisation Thermal Trip VN> 1 Volatge Set K Time Delay Factor I< 1 Status Directional Fwd Zero Sequence 1.000 A 5 V 0 Disabled IN> 1 VTSBlock V> Voltage Set Thermal Alarm VN> 1 Time Delay Basis Time Delay I< 1 Current Set Non-Directional 1.0 V 70.0% 5 s 1 0.05 IN> 1 Current Set IN Forward Time Constant 1 VN> 1 TMS Residual Current I< 1 Time delay 200.0 mA 100.0 mA 10.00 1 0.1 1 IN> 1 Time Delay Time Delay Time Constant 2 VN> 1 tRESET Residual Power I< 2 Status 1 s 0 s 5.00 0 0.5 Disabled IN> 1 Time Delay VTS Scheme Logic VN> 2 Status I< 2 Current Set 0.2 s Shared Enabled 0.1 IN> 1 TMS Tripping VN> 2 Voltage Set I< 2 Time delay 1 Three Phase 10 V IN> 1 Time Dial Tp VN> 2 Time Dela 2 y 7 20.00 ms 10 s IN> 1 Reset Char IN Rev Factor DT 0.600 IN> 1 tRESET 0 s IN> 2 Function Enabled IN> 2 Directional Non-Directional IN> 2 VTSBlock Non-Directional IN> 2 Current Set 300.0 mA IN> 2 Time Delay VTS 2.0 s Idem for IN> 3 & IN> 4 IN> Char Angle Polarisation -45 Zero Sequence P44x/EN HI/H75 Menu Content Tables Page 10/12 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 VOLT PROTECTION GROUP1 FREQ PROTECTION GROUP1 CB FAIL & I< GROUP1 SUPERVISION GROUP1 V< & V> MODE UNDER BREAKERFAIL VT SUPERVISION 00000000 FREQUENCY GROUP1 GROUP1 UNDERVOLTAGE OVERVOLTAGE F< 1 Status OVER CBFail 1 Status VTSTime Delay GROUP1 GROUP1 Disabled FREQUENCY Enabled 5.0 s V< Measur't Mode V> Measur't Mode F< 1 Setting F> 1 Status CBFail 1 Timer VTSI2> & I0> Inhibit Phase-Neutral Phase-Neutral 49,5 Hz Disabled 200.0 ms 50.0 mA V< 1 Function V> 1 Function F< 1 Time Delay F> 1 Setting CBFail 2 Status Detect 3P DT DT 4 s 50;5 Hz Disabled Disabled V< 1 Voltage Set V> 1 Voltage Set F< 2 Status F> 1 Time Delay CBFail 2 Timer Threshold 3P 50.0 V 75.0 V Disabled 2 s 0.4 30.0 V V< 1 Time Delay V> 1 Time Delay F< 2 Setting F> 2 Status CBF Non I Reset Delta I> 10.0 s 10.0 s 49 Hz Disabled CBOpen & I< 100.0 mA V< 1 TMS V> 1 TMS F< 2 Time Delay F> 2 Setting CBF Ext Reset CT SUPERVISION 1 1 3 s 51 Hz CBOpen & I< GROUP1 V< 2 Status V> 2 Status F< 3 Status F> 2 Time Delay Under Current I< CTSStatus Disabled Enabled Disabled 1 s GROUP1 Disabled V< 2 Voltage Set V> 2 Voltage Set F< 3 Setting I < Current Set CTSVN< Inhibit 38.0 V 90.0 V 48.5 Hz 50.00 mA 1.0 V V< 2 Time Delay V> 2 Time Delay F< 3 Time Delay CTSIN> Set 5.0 s 500.0 ms 2 s 100.0 mA V< 3 Status V< 3 Status F< 4 Status CTSTime Delay Disabled Disabled Disabled 5.0 s V< 3 Voltage Set V> 3 Voltage Set F< 4 Setting CVT SUPERVISION 30.0 V 100.0 V 48 Hz GROUP1 V< 3 Time Delay V> 3 Time Delay F< 4 Time Delay CVTSStatus 1.0 s 1.0 s 1 s Disabled V< 4 Status V> 4 Status CVTSVN> Disabled Disabled 1.0 V V< 4 Voltage Set V> 4 Voltage Set CVTSTime Delay 25.0 V 105.0 V 100.0 s V< 4 Time Delay V> 4 Time Delay 1.0 s 1.0 s Menu Content Tables P44x/EN HI/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444) Page 11/12 SYSTEM CHECK GROUP1 AUTORECLOSE GROUP1 INPUT LABELS GROUP1 OUTPUT LABELS GROUP1 PSL DATA C/S Check Schem A/R AUTORECLOSEMODE Opto Input 1 Relay 1 Grp 1 PSL Ref idem for GROUP 7 GROUP1 Opto Label 01 Relay Label 01 2, 3 & 4 C/S check Schem Man CB 1PTrip Mode P441/ 2/ 4 P441/ 2/ 4 26 May 2005 111 1/ 3 11:21:14:441 V< Dead Line 3PTrip Mode Opto Input 8 Relay 14 Grp 1 PSL ID 13.0 V 3/ 3 Opto Label 08 Relay Label 14 -481741114 V> Live Line 1P - Dead Time 1 P442/ 4 P442/ 4 Grp 2 PSL Ref 32.0 V 1.0 s V< Dead Bus 3P - Dead Time 1 Opto Input 16 Relay 21 13.0 V 1.0 Opto Label 16 Relay Label 21 V> Live Bus Dead Time 2 P444 P444 Idem for group 3 & 4 32.0 V 60.0 s Diff Voltage Dead Time 3 Opto Input 24 Relay 32 6.50 V 180.0 s Opto Label 24 Relay Label 32 Diff Frequency Dead Time 4 P444 with 50.00 mHz 180.0 s Option Diff Phase Reclaim Time Relay 46 20° 180.0 s Relay Label 46 Bus-Line Delay Reclose Time Delay 200.0 ms 100.0 ms Discrimination Time 5.0 s A/ RInhbit Wind 5.0 s C/ Son 3PRcl DT1 Enabled AUTORECLOSE LOCKOUT GROUP1 Block A/ R 2 Block A/ R2 2 P44x/EN HI/H75 Menu Content Tables Page 12/12 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Hardware / Software-Version P44x/EN VC/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 HARDWARE / SOFTWARE VERSION HISTORY AND COMPATIBILITY (Note: Includes versions released and supplied to customers only) P44x/EN VC/H75 Hardware / Software-Version MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Hardware / Software-Version P44x/EN VC/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 1/12 Relay type: P441/P442 & P444 Backward Compatibility Software version Hardware version Model number Date of issue Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility PSL Setting Files Menu Text Files Branch A2.x: First Model – P441/P442 (P444 not available) – Modbus/Kbus/IEC103 – 4 languages – Optos 48Vcc (Hardware=A) Documentation: TG 1.1671-C & OG 1.1671-B 03 10/2000 VDEW-ModBus-Kbus cells/CBaux/IRIGB/WeakInfeed/Reset IDMT/SyncCheck/AR Led V1.09 No compatibility with branch A1.x (model 02) A2.6 04 10/2000 VDEW-ModBus-Kbus cells/CBaux/IRIGB/ WeakInfeed/Reset IDMT/ SyncCheck/AR Led New S1 version V2.0 03 03 03 03 04/2001 Freq out of range (major correction)- 1/3 pole AR logic - VTS V1.10 No compatibility with branch A1.x (model 02) A2.7 04 04/2001 Frequency out of range (major correction)- 1/3 pole AR logic New S1 version V2.0 03 03 03 A2.8 04 07/2001 Communication improvement / Floc with 5Amp / IrigB V2.0 03 03 03 A2.9 04 01/ 2002 3P fault in Power Swing/SOTF logic/CB Fail/Ext. Trip + 5 ms/Z1-Z2 measure for small characteristic /SOTF-TOR / U-I prim sec V2.0 03 03 03 A2.10 04 05/2002 EEPROM correction/RCA angle/DEF correction/New general distance Trip equation (Block scheme) / Fault Locator V2.0 03 03 03 A2.11 A 04 09/2003 Last A2.x branch version: Retrip CB/Ffailure/31th December for DRec/Disturbance compressed function and communication correction/Voltage memory/DEF/Ext Csync/P.Phase ref Csync/Sync live-live/2UN Vref Sync/Z1 & Arg 2nd stage/ IDMT TMS steps/ New DDB: Internal trip+trip LED/ DRec default settings/ SOTF-TOR/ I>4&StubB/ VMemory settable/ CT polarity/ I2>/ VR>/ DNP3/ New Zone Q/ PSwing RLim/ Channel aided scheme/ I0 setting/ PSL graphic improved V2.14 + Patch C5.1 J for P441 for P442 for P444 36 04/2008 Last C5.x branch version: State&time stamp/ IEC 61850-8-1/ DNP3 over Ethernet/ Courier&Group/ I2&Dist start/ WeakInfeed TAC received extented V2.14 + Patch No compatibility with branch Ax.x No compatibility with branch Bx.x No compatibility with branch C1.x No compatibility with branch C2.x No compatibility with branch C3.x No compatibility with branch C4.x Hardware / Software-Version P44x/EN VC/H75 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 11/12 Relay type: P441/P442 & P444 Backward Compatibility Software- version Hardware version Model number Date of issue Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility PSL Setting Files Menu Text Files Branch C5.x : Idem C3.x with new HW suffix K: extended buttons, high break contacts, tri colors LEDs… Documentation: P44x/EN T/G75 / P44x/EN T/H75 D1.0 40 02/2007 HW suffix K/ Start D & Phase Selection/ New DDB cells V> &V earth overcurrent with DT or IDMT, - IDMT step size for TMS from 0.025 to 0.005 - Extension from 4 In to 10 In the maximum setting range for the 2 first stages - Labels for disturbance records modified, - “SOFT I>3 Enabled” TOR/SOTF mode creation, - “Trip LED” menu added in DDB - voltage memory validity settable from 0s to 10s (step 0.01s) - CT connection can be modified by software - Negative sequence overcurrent protection enhanced, - Residual overvoltage enhanced - DNP3 serial added - Zone Q added - resistance limits for power swing = R1, R2, RP, RQ, R3/R4) - Channel aided trip modification - Channel-aided distance schemes: trip after receipt of signal from remote end protection and Tp instead of T1. - New settings for I0 threshold - InterMiCom Interrupt integration V2.14 + Patch S1 Studio No compatibility with branch Ax.x No compatibility with branch Bx.x No compatibility with branch Cx.x No compatibility with branch D1.x P44x/EN VC/H75 Hardware / Software-Version Page 12/12 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay type: P441/P442 & P444 Backward Compatibility Software- version Hardware version Model number Date of issue Full Description of changes S1 Compatibility PSL Setting Files Menu Text Files D3.0 K for P442 for P444 50 06/2009 Last D2.x branch version: The following features are added: - New undercurrent protection features, - New Frequency protection features, - DDB with 2047 cells - Undervoltage protection: stages 3&4 (V4) added, - new autoreclose blocking parameters V2.14 + Patch V3.0 (S1 Studio) No compatibility with branch Ax.x No compatibility with branch Bx.x No compatibility with branch Cx.x No compatibility with branch D1.x No compatibility with branch D3.x 28/02/11 Rebranded from AREVA to ALSTOM PXXX Product Description GRID Alstom Grid © - ALSTOM 2011. ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of ALSTOM. The other names mentioned, registered or not, are the property of their respective companies. The technical and other data contained in this document is provided for information only. Neither ALSTOM, its officers or employees accept responsibility for, or should be taken as making any representation or warranty (whether express or implied), as to the accuracy or completeness of such data or the achievement of any projected performance criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to revise or change this data at any time without further notice. Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre www.alstom.com/grid/contactcentre/ Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070 www.alstom.com